JP7021662B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts to rotate, and the reel stops during the rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention
As the gaming state, a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur and a normal state in which the specific event does not occur are set.
A specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state.
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event and the specific event means.
When the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied, the specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state, and
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state and the specific end means.
A specific notification means capable of controlling a predetermined notification means so that the specific notification of the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is performed over a plurality of unit execution periods.
Equipped with
As the specific state, a high specific state in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is likely to be the specific result, and a low specific state in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is less likely to be the specific result than the high specific state. The state is set and
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification so as to include the normal state and a plurality of the high specific states from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification. And.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the normal AT mode lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the AT mode lottery process for CZ. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a precursor mode. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the immediate notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ mode game number table and the precursor effect game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pushing order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous section transition game. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the transition relation of a display mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and the end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for CZ mode start. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process in CZ mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for the end of CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the production content of each game in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the weapon discovery production table in the 1st preparation production. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor effect table and a pseudo precursor effect table. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and continuous production. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and continuous production. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and continuous production. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and continuous production. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and continuous production. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and continuous production. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between a CZ mode and a continuous production. In the second embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing a section display second process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an advantageous section end lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for the end of CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship of the degree of advantage between the presence / absence of the end of an advantageous section and the continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for the end of CZ. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the advantageous section end game, the section display, and the continuous effect. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the setting process of the precursor mode in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output an exciting pulse of 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first of the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th of the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line where bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set, and when the symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line, As a winning result, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out, or a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started, and these three or two medals are started. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game in which three medals are bet and started is a three-bet game, a game in which two medals are bet and started is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the symbol corresponding to the first small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbol corresponding to the second small winning combination is stopped in the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is aligned and stopped in the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above first small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is awarded. If the 4th small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbol corresponding to the fourth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-up line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 3rd small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is awarded. If the fifth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth small winning combination is stopped in the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is aligned and stopped in the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is awarded. If the sixth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a small mountain shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

"Bell" design on the left reel 32L, "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design or "youth" design on the middle reel 32M, and "white 7" design, "white shell" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be won. If the 7th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the 8th small winning combination is awarded. If the 8th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbol corresponding to the eighth small winning combination is stopped in the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped in the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are so-called missing roles, in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. "White 7" design, "Cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "Youth" design, "Red 7" design, "Watermelon" design, "Replay" design, "BAR" design, "BAR" design "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, all of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination prize to the 32nd small winning combination winning are stopped with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination prize to 32nd small winning combination winning, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st re-game prize to 12th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 10, a winning symbol combination is set for each of the first re-game to the twelfth re-game.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. When the symbol corresponding to the second replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned on the right-up line L5 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (b). As described above, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are stopped in order from the left on the upward-sloping line L5. When the second re-game winning is established, the transition to the gaming state does not occur, but the transition to the notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the first AT state as a so-called pseudo-bonus starts.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the "bell" symbol, "ark shell" symbol or "youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. If you stop at the top, you will win a prize. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the "white 7" symbol is aligned on the lower line L3 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (d). As such, the "Red 7" symbol is aligned on the downward-sloping line L4 and stops. When the third re-game winning is established, the transition to the gaming state does not occur, but the transition to the notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the second AT state as a so-called pseudo-bonus starts.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The sixth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 6th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The 7th replay consists of the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the middle. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. And, the prize is established when it stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "replay" symbol does not stop in the middle of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle replay tempai is stopped.

The tenth replay consists of the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game prize or the 12th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and perform a stop operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 10th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 12th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize. In the eleventh re-game, the prize is established when the tenth re-game and the twelfth re-game cannot be won, that is, when the omission may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent the storage tank 52 from storing a predetermined amount or more of medals. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the specified number of games is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number of cards is set to 2 and the specified number of cards is set to 2, two cards are inserted on condition that there are credits. When the virtual medal is inserted and the specified number is set as 3 or 2, and the specific number is set as 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, The first is when three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there is a credit, the specified number is set as three or two, and the specific number is set as two. When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on condition that there are credits. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. The slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The operation surface of the first credit insertion switch 56 is set to be larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit input switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by throwing in a set specific number of sheets out of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order display that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order is notified. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with a section display for showing an advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be advanced in a situation advantageous to the player by changing the winning rate of the small winning combination. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, the model name of the game machine is described, and a lower display unit 69 constituting a predetermined display screen is provided. There is. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the gaming state advantageous to the player and the non-advantageous state. The role ratio monitor 77 is a main control device so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a combination monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are included. It is connected via the output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the start pre-processing, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a two-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process is performed. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3" except in the bonus state. In step S205, an affirmative judgment is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the process of waiting for the start in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side in step S206. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S208. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211 and the medal payout process of step S212 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for 2-bet games is set.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the flag for the gaming state set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is determined. Select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags is set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and it is for the normal gaming state. Select a lottery table. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select a lottery table for normal game states (FIG. 21). Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2". → Update the setting values so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is also updated each time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is regarded as the operation for confirming the set value, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the setting process of the winning probability is completed. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a two-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 to the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is set. If you have not won, the corresponding winning flag will not be set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, for example, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination are carried over. Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

In addition, a lottery table in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 in 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 in 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 in 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5). The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). (Probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the pinch bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless of each, it is about 1/184. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 ~ It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any of the roles including the first BB is 0. In the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the first BB state (net increase number minus about 1.77).

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal gaming state, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is played in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the probability of the case. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11 to 22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/181 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1 / 4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the second BB is 0. In the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the two-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 2-bet game, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase of the second BB (net increase number minus about 0.64).

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, if the watermelon is won (winning when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination will be displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize is set. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB prize is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If you have won a small winning combination and a bonus, set the priority so that the small winning combination will be given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning will be established. .. If the replay and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the replay prize is prioritized and established.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1st BB winning, the 7th small role and the 7th. When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8 small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-game, the 3rd re-game and the 4th re-game winning is set, priority is given so that each re-game winning is prioritized over the 2nd BB winning. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game winning of any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to know which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → right. When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The design arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that sections separated by 5 or more symbols are formed, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right will be described as an example. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. The 18th small role symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red clam" symbol and a "white clam" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any one of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing that allows them to be stopped, stop control is performed so that the symbols with a small number of sliding frames are stopped at the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "ark shell" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 frames), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, while the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the medium reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper row, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper row, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the upper row of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small is won by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the possibility that a winning combination will be established, there is also a possibility that the 20th small winning combination will be established by winning the middle-forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Cannot be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning combination symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle forward push bell 1 has been won or the middle forward push bell 2 has been won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped to win the 18th small winning combination. And even if it is a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for it and win a prize.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "ark shell" symbol, which are the third small role symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small winning combination, 3rd small winning combination, 4th small winning combination, 5th small winning combination, or 6th small winning combination is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the operation is performed. Depending on the operation timing, the small winning combination will be established, or none of the small winning combination will be established and will be missed. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the 1st small role prize, the 2nd small role prize, the 3rd small role prize, the 4th small role prize, the 5th small role prize , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not the winning is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-gaming prize to the twelfth re-game winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the re-game setting process is performed so that the game mode is set to the re-game mode. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current game mode is the re-game mode, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is present depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, when neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags are set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes are not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB winnings is established, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first BB winning is established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, the process of inputting "46" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the upper limit payout number in each BB state. That is, by inputting "46" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the display control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 and the speaker 64 so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of games in the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bets are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "2" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when two or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, a process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, not only in the first BB state, but also in the second BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the second BB state is performed in the three-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB state. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables are provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a normal Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1/9.02, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1/78. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1/3.13. In this case, a decrease of about 0.96 medals can be expected per game (net increase minus about 0.96).

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/9.03, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that the prize is more likely to occur than the normal game state. In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal game state, the probability is about 1/964. In the 2nd BB state, there is a 1/9.0 chance of winning a prize, and even in a 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win a prize than the normal game state. It is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, since the lottery table in which the medals can be reduced in each game is adopted, the increase in the number of medals held even if the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are exhausted will increase. It cannot be expected, and conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will decrease by digesting the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, as a result of the lottery processing by the above-mentioned BB state lottery table and each reel control, it is determined whether or not any small winning combination is established in this game. If the prize is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if the common bell is won in the 2nd BB state and the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination are established, 13 cards will be paid out. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter and the BB counter is 0. It becomes as follows.

If it is determined in step S517 that the value is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed in step S519, and the BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S520. More specifically, the first BB end command is output and set when the first BB state is terminated, and the second BB end command is output and set when the second BB state is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for ending the first BB and the effect for ending the second BB are performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. The game will be played at. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 and the 2nd credit insertion switch 57. In order to play the betting game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal slot 45.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 26.

In the initial state in which the RAM 106 is initialized (cleared), the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set, and in a normal gaming state (non-internal state) in which no BB is won. be. In this case, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in the 3-bet game, the 1st BB can be won, but the 2nd BB cannot be won, and in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB can be won, but the 1st BB cannot be won. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, basically, the winning of the second BB may occur in the two-bet game.

If the first BB or the second BB is won and the winning game is not successful, the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over (internal state). Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified number of bets (specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 3-bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the first BB is won, the first BB prize can be established in the 3-bet game, while the first BB prize cannot be established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. Further, in the internal state in which the second BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the second BB winning cannot be established in the 3-bet game, while the second BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game. Will be done. That is, if the first BB is won in the 3-bet game, the first BB prize can be established if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, but if the first BB is won and then the 2-bet game is switched to, the first BB prize is won. Cannot be established. In addition, if the 2nd BB is won in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB winning can be established if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, but if the 2nd BB is won and then the 3-bet game is switched to, the 2nd BB winning is achieved. Cannot be established. Then, the first BB and the second BB are not won in duplicate, and in a situation where the first BB is carried over, the first BB is not won again, and the second BB is not won in duplicate. In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB will not be won again, and the first BB will not be won in duplicate. That is, if the game is played in the 2-bet game when the 1st BB is won, the game in the internal state where the 1st BB winning is carried over continues endlessly, and when the 2nd BB is won, the game is played in the 3-bet game. Then, the game in the internal state carrying over the second BB winning will continue endlessly.

Here, since the 1st BB winning is established only in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB winning is established only in the 2-bet game as described above, 3 in the situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over. Even if the result is not won in any of the roles in the bet game, the 2nd BB prize will not be established, and if the result is lost in the 2-bet game in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the 2nd BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the 1st BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is carried over is carried over. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to make a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win another role at the time of the drop.

Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing the medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order (FIG. 25) from the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

Then, in the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, first, in the non-internal state, the game is played in a 2-bet game, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, it becomes an internal state, and in the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game is switched to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB winning, and generally, the 2nd BB winning is carried over inside. The game in the state will be continued.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB winning flag is stored in the normal area in the various flag storage areas 106d, whereas the second BB winning flag is stored in the storage area in the various flag storage areas 106d. It is configured to be. The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags of other roles are stored. Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by the backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 is started while the various flags stored in the normal area are stored, and the first BB is won. Even if the power is turned on / off with the flag set, the slot machine 10 is started with the first BB winning flag set. However, when the winning probability setting process is activated (when the setting is changed) when the slot machine 10 is started up, the normal area initialization process (clear process) is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in these normal areas.

On the other hand, the storage area is an area in which only the second BB winning flag is stored. Similar to the above-mentioned normal area, the flag stored in the storage area is not cleared by turning the power ON / OFF. Further, in the storage area, even if the winning probability setting process is activated when the slot machine 10 is started up, the storage area initialization process is not performed (it is excluded from the initialization process). ). Therefore, even if the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is not cleared and is retained (saved). That is, when the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the first BB winning in which the first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and the operation is started as a non-internal state. , If the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the 2nd BB winning in which the 2nd BB winning flag is stored, the 2nd BB winning flag is not cleared and the operation is started in the internal state of the 2nd BB winning. The flag. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game in the internal state in which the second BB winning is carried over, not only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off, but also when the setting is changed.

Then, in order to play the game in the internal state that carries over the second BB winning, basically, the game may be played until the second BB is won in the 2-bet game at the time of factory shipment of the slot machine 10. The second BB winning will be stored and retained until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clearing process is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably carry out the game in a state where the second BB winning is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise of a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Processing for lottery results>
First, the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The lottery result correspondence process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a shift lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step S601, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed. More specifically, it is either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, or it is the non-internal state (normal gaming state) before the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, or the internal state after the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won. Know if it is (carry-over state). In the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 3 is set as the specified bet number, and in the non-internal state before the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the internal state after the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the specified bet number is set. 2 and 3 are set. Then, in step S602, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is one specified number (specified specified number) specified in the state grasped in step S601. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3, and in this case, since the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3, the first BB in step S601. When it is determined that the state is the state or the second BB state, a positive determination is always made in step S602. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, 3 out of 2 and 3 of the specified number is set as the specified specified number, and other than the first BB state and the second BB state. When the number of bets is 3 in the state of, affirmative determination is made in step S602. In this case, the process for the display mode (process for the instruction function) after step S603 is performed. On the other hand, when the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the lottery result correspondence process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the internal state is played in a two-bet game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S603 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make the internal state play in a 3-bet game and facilitate a normal game in which the second BB is carried over.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding whether or not the push order notification or the like is generated, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is an advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S604, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 33, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 33, as the trigger of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and the latest updated value of the counter is acquired in step S703. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not an out-of-order result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or the transition has been completed. If neither flag is set in step S605 and the transition to the AT mode has not been confirmed yet, the AT lottery process is executed in step S606. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S605, the AT addition process is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the maximum number of games (number of ceiling games) that can be consumed without shifting to the AT mode in the advantageous section. A predetermined lottery value is input to the ceiling counter at the time of transition to the advantageous section. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the ceiling counter is set to 999. That is, by digesting a maximum of 999 games after shifting to the advantageous section, the transition to the AT mode will occur even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter is executed. Then, in step S802, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has become 0. If it is not 0, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S803 to S805.

That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not any of the first CZ mode flag, the second CZ mode flag, and the third CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode are provided as a state before winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, which is an advantageous section, and the CZ mode wins the lottery for shifting to the AT mode rather than the normal mode. It is set as an easy mode. As the CZ mode, a first CZ mode, a second CZ mode, and a third CZ mode having different transition triggers are set, and in the above-mentioned first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag, the CPU 102 sets the first CZ mode to the third CZ mode. It is a flag to distinguish. If it is determined in step S803 that any CZ mode flag is not set, the normal AT mode lottery process is executed in step S804, and any CZ mode flag is set in step S803. If so, the AT mode lottery process for CZ is executed in step S805.

In the normal AT mode lottery process of step S804, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S901. Then, in step S902, the normal AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 33, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table, the transition rate to the AT mode (the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 33, as the trigger of the normal AT mode transition lottery, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the normal AT mode transition lottery.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S902, the process of acquiring the random number for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S903. Then, in step S904, the AT mode transition lottery is executed, and then the AT mode lottery process ends. That is, in the normal AT mode lottery process, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery result of each game.

On the other hand, in the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by using the lottery results of a plurality of games in the CZ mode.

That is, in the CZ AT mode lottery process of step S805, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, first, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S1001. Then, in step S1002, a process of acquiring a point table from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 33, the point table is set so that the point value acquired in this game can be different depending on the lottery result of each game. For example, the lottery result of this game is Cherry A. In some cases, 20 points will be obtained, and if the lottery result of this game is Cherry B, which is harder to win than Cherry A, 50 points will be obtained. The lower the result, the more points you will get.

Then, in step S1003, a process of adding the point value acquired in this game to the cumulative counter RC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. In this embodiment, the lottery result command of each game is set to include the information of the cumulative counter RC, and the value of the cumulative counter RC is displayed on the display control device 81 side together with the lottery result of each game. It is possible to grasp.

In the following step S1004, a process of grasping the CZ counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is consumed in the CZ mode. Then, in step S1005, the process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ from various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in step S1006, the AT mode transition lottery is executed, and then the AT mode transition lottery process for CZ is performed. finish.

As shown in FIG. 34, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the product of a predetermined number set according to the value of the CZ counter and the value of the cumulative counter RC and the cumulative counter RC is set as the winning probability (%) of the AT mode transition lottery, for example. When the CZ counter is 16 or more, the predetermined number is set as 0.1 if the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 59, and the predetermined number is set as 0.6 if the cumulative counter RC is 80 to 100. To. In this case, if the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 30, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 3% due to the product of the predetermined number (0.1) and the cumulative counter RC (30). Become. If the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 54% due to the product of the predetermined number (0.6) and the cumulative counter RC (90). .. When the CZ counter is 3 to 1, the predetermined number is set as 0.5 if the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 9, and the predetermined number is 1.0 if the cumulative counter RC is 50 to 100. Is set as. In this case, if the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 5, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 3% due to the product of the predetermined number (0.6) and the cumulative counter RC (5). Will be. If the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 90% due to the product of the predetermined number (1.0) and the cumulative counter RC (90). Become.

That is, in the CZ mode in the present embodiment, the larger the point value acquired in each game in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery, and the smaller the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the more the AT mode transition lottery. It is set to make it easier to win. Even if the point value acquired in each game in the CZ mode is large, it is set so that it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is large. In this way, it is suppressed that the AT mode transition lottery is won early after the transition to the CZ mode, and the game (directing) in the CZ mode while increasing the attention to the lottery result of each game in the CZ mode. ) Has been devised to entertain to the end.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after executing the AT mode lottery process in step S804 or step S805, the AT mode transition lottery in the AT mode lottery process of steps S804 and S805 was won in step S806. Judge whether or not. If it is won, the AT mode winning process of steps S807 to S810 is executed, and if it is not won, the AT mode non-winning process of steps S811 to S819 is executed.

That is, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, first, the precursor mode setting process is executed in step S807. Even when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in step S802, the process proceeds to step S807 to perform the setting process of the precursor mode. The precursor mode is a situation in which the transition to the AT mode may occur on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 when the transition to the AT mode may occur due to winning the AT mode transition lottery or the like. This is a mode that produces a precursory effect that suggests that. In step S807, a process of setting the number of games in the precursory mode and the like is performed according to the opportunity that the transition to the AT mode may occur.

That is, in the precursor mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S1101, the process of grasping the cumulative counter RC is executed, and in the subsequent step S1102, the process of grasping the CZ counter is performed. To execute. Then, in step S1103, a process of acquiring an immediate notification lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in step S1104, an immediate notification lottery process is executed. In the immediate notification lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the notification that the transition to the AT mode may occur is executed without going through the above-mentioned precursor effect.

As shown in FIG. 35, the immediate notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the immediate notification lottery differs depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the smaller the value of the CZ counter, that is, the smaller the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the immediate notification lottery, and the larger the value of the cumulative counter RC, that is, the point value acquired during the CZ mode. The larger the value, the easier it is to win the immediate notification lottery. When the CZ counter is 0 and the AT mode transition is won in the normal mode, the present embodiment is configured to win the immediate notification lottery with a 100% probability.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the immediate notification lottery in step S1104 has been won. If the immediate notification lottery has not been won, the precursor mode processing is performed in steps S1106 to S1113, and if the immediate notification lottery has been won, the AT mode notification processing is performed in steps S1114 to S1119. conduct.

If the immediate notification lottery has not been won, in step S1106, it is determined whether or not the situation in which the AT mode transition lottery was won this time was the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode of the CZ modes. In the case of the second CZ mode instead of the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode, the lottery process for the number of precursory effect games is executed in step S1107. Then, in step S1108, a process of inputting a value obtained by adding the lottery result of step S1107 and the current CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode) to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. do. The precursor counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games from the situation where the transition to the AT mode may occur to the notification of the situation (AT winning notification effect).

In the lottery process for the number of precursory effect games in step S1107, the precursory effect game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of precursory effect games this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the precursor effect game number table is set so that any one of 13 games to 15 games is selected. For example, 15 games are easily selected, while 13 games and 14 games are easily selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to select. For example, if 14 games are selected in the precursory effect game number lottery process and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 3 games, 17 is input to the precursory counter, and the transition to the AT mode may occur. (After the AT mode winning flag is set), a notification to that effect will be given after 17 games.

After executing the input process of the precursor counter in step S1108, the process of setting the precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1109. Then, in step S1110, the process of setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of setting the precursor mode is terminated. The precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the precursor mode has been set, and the precursor command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the precursor mode has been set. be. Further, the precursor command includes the value of the precursor counter, and the display control device 81 grasps the game to be notified from the value of the precursor counter that the situation where the transition to the AT mode may occur is possible. It becomes possible. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the precursor command is received will be described in detail later.

In the case of the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode in step S1106, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not it is the first CZ mode, and in the case of the first CZ mode, it is predetermined in the CZ counter in step S1112. The process of inputting the value obtained by adding the predetermined number (5) to the precursor counter is executed. Further, when it is determined in step S1111 that the mode is not the first CZ mode but the third CZ mode, the process of inputting the value of the CZ counter to the precursor counter is executed in step S1113. Then, after executing the precursor flag set process in step S1109 and the precursor command set process in step S1110, the precursor mode setting process is terminated. In this case, in the first CZ mode, a predetermined number of games are executed after the number of remaining games in the first CZ mode becomes 0, and in the third CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is executed. When becomes 0, the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is performed.

That is, the number of games until the notification that the AT mode transition lottery is won differs depending on the type of CZ mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the first CZ mode is smaller than the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode. The number of games will be used to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. The reason for such a configuration will be described in detail when explaining the content of the effect in the CZ mode.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the immediate notification lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1114. In step S1114, a process of clearing the CZ counter to 0 is executed. After that, in step S1105, an AT type determination process is performed to determine whether the AT mode type this time is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. In the present embodiment, as the AT mode, the first AT mode and the second AT mode, which have different additional performance (probability of winning the additional lottery) in the AT mode, are set, and the second AT mode has the additional performance than the first AT mode. Is excellent (it is set so that it is easy to win the additional lottery). In the AT type determination process of step S1115, for example, the AT mode type of this time is randomly selected according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, and the like. Determined by.

In step S1116, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode is determined based on the processing result of step S1115. In the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1117, and the first AT winning immediate notification command is output to the display control device 81 in step S1118. After executing the setting process, the setting process of this precursor mode ends. The 1st AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the 1st AT start roll appears on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the 1st AT mode, and is a 1st AT winning immediate notification command. Is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the situation where the transition to the first AT mode may occur has occurred. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first AT winning immediate notification command will be described in detail later.

When it is determined in step S1116 that it is the second AT instead of the first AT, the process of setting the second AT notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1119, and the second AT winning immediate notification command is executed in step S1120. Is executed as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the setting process of the precursor mode is terminated. The second AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that a second AT start roll appears on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the second AT mode, and is a second AT winning immediate notification command. Is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the situation where the transition to the second AT mode may occur has occurred. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second AT winning immediate notification command will also be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after executing the precursor mode setting process in step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. If any of the CZ mode flags is set, the process of clearing the set CZ mode flag is executed in step S809. If a negative determination is made in step S808, or after the process of step S809 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S810, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. By performing such processing, in the lottery result correspondence processing after the next game, affirmative determination is made in step S605.

When it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it is determined in step S811 whether or not any of the CZ mode flags is set. If none of the CZ mode flags are set and the normal mode is used, a lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is performed in steps S812 to S819. On the other hand, when any of the CZ mode flags is set, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is without performing the processes of steps S812 to S819.

That is, in step S812, the advantageous section game number AG provided in the various counter areas 106e is equal to or greater than the predetermined first predetermined value (31) and equal to or less than the predetermined second predetermined value (700). Judge whether or not. The advantageous section game number AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and is added by 1 for each game after shifting to the advantageous section, and is reset when the advantageous section ends. When the number of advantageous section games AG is less than the first predetermined number or larger than the second predetermined number, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is without performing the transition lottery to the CZ mode.

In the present embodiment, the CZ mode may be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the first predetermined number is until the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode set at the transition to the advantageous section is completed. It is set as a number larger than the number of games required for. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section becomes 0, so that the transition to the AT mode is permitted without going through the AT mode transition lottery. The second predetermined value is a value close to the upper limit value (999) of the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and more specifically, it is set as 700 as a value of 70% of the upper limit value.

That is, when the advantageous section is exhausted to a value close to the upper limit value of the ceiling counter, the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is not performed. The ceiling counter setting process will be described in detail later, but a value smaller than the second predetermined value may be set in the ceiling counter at the time of transition to an advantageous section. In this case, a CZ mode transition lottery or the like is performed. Before reaching the maximum number of games (700), the ceiling is reached and the transition to AT mode is allowed. In other words, even if a value smaller than the second predetermined value is input to the ceiling counter, the CZ mode transition lottery may be won immediately before reaching the ceiling.

When the number of advantageous section games AG is within the range in which the CZ mode transition lottery is performed in step S812, the process of acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S813, and the process is performed in step S814. Then, the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 33, in the CZ mode transition lottery table, the transition rate to the CZ mode (the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. For example, if the lottery result of this game is chance A, there is a 7% chance of winning the CZ mode transition lottery, and if the lottery result of this game is chance B, which is harder to win than chance A. , The probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery is higher than in the case of chance A, and the lower the appearance rate as the result of the game lottery, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. Has been done.

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. If it is not won, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. If the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, the second CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S816, and the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step S817. The process of setting the second CZ mode flag is executed in S818. That is, when the CZ mode transition lottery in the normal mode is won in the advantageous section, the second CZ mode is set, and the number of games is determined by the lottery process in step S816. In the lottery process for the number of second CZ mode games, the second CZ mode game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of games in the second CZ mode this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the second CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 8 games to 15 games is selected. For example, 10 games and 11 games are easily selected, while 8 games are selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as games and 15 games are difficult to select. For example, when 10 games are selected in the second CZ mode game number lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step S817.

After setting the second CZ mode flag in step S818, the process of setting the second CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S819, and then the AT lottery process ends. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

<Process for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. As described above, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1201, the lottery result of this game is grasped. Then, in steps S1202 to S1208, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table according to the current situation is executed. That is, in step S1202, the AT mode winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred after the transition to the AT mode can occur. If the situation is before the transition to the AT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, and it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The situation in which the first AT notification flag and the second AT notification flag are set is after the notification that the transition to the AT mode is likely to occur (AT winning notification effect) is executed. Moreover, it means that the transition to the AT mode has not occurred. In other words, the situation in which neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set in step S1203 is a situation in which a transition to the AT mode may occur, but a notification to that effect is still available. It means that the situation is not done (precursor mode).

Therefore, if it is determined in step S1203 that neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set, in step S1204, a lottery table is added from the various table storage areas 105a before the winning notification. When the process of acquiring is executed and it is determined in step S1203 that any of the flags is set, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table after the winning notification and before the transition is executed in step S12056.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the additional lottery table before the winning notification and the additional lottery table before the transition after the winning notification are compared, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before the transition after the winning notification is won. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before notification. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by the chance eye B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before the winning notification is won with a probability of 5%, whereas the additional lottery after the winning notification is added before the transition. In the additional lottery using the table, there is a 7% probability of winning, and in the situation before the transition to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after the winning notification than before the AT mode winning notification.

The case where the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1202 means that the AT mode flag is set, and it means that the transition to the AT mode has already occurred. In this case, the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the current AT mode is the first AT mode. In the first AT mode, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the first AT from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S1207, and in the second AT mode, the various table storage areas 105a are executed in step S1208. The process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the second AT is executed.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the 1st AT additional lottery table and the 2nd AT additional lottery table are compared, the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table uses the 1st AT additional lottery table. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, in the additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table, there is a 10% probability of winning, whereas the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table is used. In the lottery, there is a 20% probability of winning, and in the situation after the transition to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

After the additional lottery table is acquired by any of the processes of step S1204, step S1205, step S1207, and step S1208, the additional lottery is executed in step S1209. Then, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is not won, the AT addition process is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, the additional game number lottery process is executed in step S1211. In the additional game number lottery process, the additional game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of additional games this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, the number of additional games table is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, the addition is performed with the normal lip A as an opportunity. In that case, an average of 150 games will be added, while if the cherry A is used as an opportunity, an average of 15 games will be added. The case is set so that the number of additional games is larger.

After executing the process of drawing the number of additional games in step S1211, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1212. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode. After executing the process of step S1212, the process of setting the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1213, and then the AT addition process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the addition command executes a process for performing the addition notification effect corresponding to the addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

The explanation returns to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27).

After executing the process of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order winning combination. The push order combination is a result including a normal lip A, a normal lip B, and a normal lip C in addition to the push order bell. Normal rip A, normal rip B, and normal rip C are all results of winning multiple replays, so that the replays that establish a prize may differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, in the normal lip A, the reels 32L, 32M, so that the first replay winning is basically established regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop control of 32R is performed. On the other hand, in the normal lip B and the normal lip C, when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, respectively, so that the second re-game prize and the third re-game prize are established. When the stop control of 32R is performed and the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first replay winning prize is established. .. However, in these normal rip A, normal rip B, and normal rip C, even if any of the re-game winnings of the duplicate winning re-game is established, the privilege to be given is the re-game, and the re-game is established. Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are game results in which the re-game winning is established regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop result differs depending on the operation order. Then, in particular, the normal rip B and the normal rip C are the triggers for starting the AT mode, and after the AT mode winning flag is set, the notification that the transition to the AT mode may occur is executed. After that, after the first AT mode is started in the game in which the second re-game winning can be established, the AT mode winning flag is set, and then the notification that the transition to the AT mode can occur is executed. , The second AT mode is started in the game in which the third re-game prize can be established. That is, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the above notification (AT winning notification effect) is executed, and after the above notification is executed. However, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the game is such that the second re-game prize and the third re-game prize can be established.

When it is determined in step S608 that the push order winning combination is won, it is determined in step S609 whether or not any of the CZ mode flag, the AT mode winning flag, or the AT mode flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S610, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S608 or step S609, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the push order notification process executed in step S610, an outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. 40 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 40 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8 in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and these first display segments N1 to 7 display are used. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally to the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, on the instruction monitor 68, at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and "." Can be displayed.

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and further, 7 instead of 8 segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8. A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1. The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a push order notification to occur is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied. .. Further, it is turned off when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It serves as a section display (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of the medal is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when the lighting state is set), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display section (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined (so that the illuminance is doubled). Also from such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and it is displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

<Process for notification of push order>
Next, the push order notification process executed in step S610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not any of the first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag is set. When none of the first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. The case where the first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag are not set and the AT mode winning flag is set is a case where the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode is won. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the AT mode winning flag is set but these AT notification flags are not set, it means that the AT mode transition lottery has been won but the precursor mode is still in progress. In this case, the push order notification is not generated in this game, and the push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal rip B or normal rip C. If the normal rip A or the push order bell is used instead of the normal rip B and the normal rip C, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. In the case of either normal rip B or normal rip C, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not it is normal rip B. In the case of the normal lip B, in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the normal rip B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1307 and the process for starting the first AT mode is executed.

That is, in step S1307, the first AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1308, the first AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The first AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode is started from this game. After that, in step S1309, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the second re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1310, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. In the display control device 81 that has received this push order command, as the push order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning, the push order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first and "Aim from the right! The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display such as "!", Voice navigation, and the like are performed, and the symbol corresponding to the second replay winning prize is notified.

If it is determined in step S1305 that the normal lip C is not the normal lip B, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set instead of the second AT notification flag, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the normal rip C is won and the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1312 to execute the process for starting the second AT mode.

That is, in step S1312, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1313, the second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second AT mode is started from this game. After that, in step S1314, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the third re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1315, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. In the display control device 81 that has received this push order command, as the push order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning prize, the push order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first and "Aim from the right! The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display such as "!", Voice navigation, and the like are performed, and the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning prize is notified.

If it is determined in step S1301 that any CZ mode flag is set, or if the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1301 and the AT mode is already in progress, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order bell. If it is not a push order bell, the push order notification process ends as it is. In the case of the push order bell, it is determined in step S1317 whether or not any of the CZ mode flags is set. When any of the CZ mode flags is set, it is determined in step S1318 whether or not the notified flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The notified flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell has already been performed in the CZ mode, and is a flag at the end of the CZ mode (including the transition to the AT mode). ) Is a flag cleared. If the notified flag is set, the push order notification process ends as it is. If the notified flag is not set, the process of setting the notified flag is executed in step S1319.

When the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag in step S1317, or after the processing of step S1319 is executed, in step S1320, the first small winning combination is won according to the type of the push order bell this time. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is performed. Then, in step S1321, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process is executed. The process for notifying the final push order is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received this push order command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the CZ mode, the AT mode, and the like is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1401, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed, and in step S1402, whether or not the number of bets of this game is a specific specified number defined in the state grasped in step S1401. Judgment is made. Such processing corresponds to the above steps S601 and S602, and if the number is not a specific specified number in step S1402, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is without performing the processing after step S1403. If the number of bets is a specific specified number corresponding to the state, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, the first game number management process is executed, and in step S1404, the second game number management process is executed. The first game number management process is a process for managing the number of games before the AT mode transition, such as CZ mode and precursor mode, and the second game number management process is a process for managing the number of games in the AT mode. be.

In the first game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and in either BB state. If there is, the first game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, if the transition to the second BB state is caused in the 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the CZ mode is not managed. If it is not in any of the BB states, the process proceeds to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not the CZ counter is larger than 0 and the number of games set at the time of transition to the CZ mode has not been exhausted. As described above, when the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode is won, the CZ mode flag is cleared in the AT lottery processing. Therefore, even in a situation where the CZ mode flag is not set, it may be determined in step S1502 that the CZ counter is larger than 0.

Incidentally, as described above, when the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, if the immediate notification lottery is not won, a value equal to or higher than the CZ counter is input to the precursor counter. That is, when the CZ counter is larger than 0 and the CZ mode flag is not set, it means that it is a precursor mode after winning the AT mode transition.

If the CZ counter is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter is executed in step S1503. Then, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the CZ counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. As described above, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode flag is cleared. Therefore, when any CZ mode flag is set in step S1505, it means that the CZ mode flag is set. This means that the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. If any of the CZ mode flags is set in step S1505, the process of setting the CZ end game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1506. The CZ end game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp the game in which the CZ mode has ended, and is cleared after the end of the finished game (see step S203).

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S1505, or after the process of step S1506 is executed, the process of setting the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1507. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the CZ end command will be described in detail later.

When the CZ counter is 0 in step S1502, when the CZ counter is not 0 in step S1504, or after the processing of step S1507 is executed, the precursor counter is larger than 0 in step S1508, and the precursor mode is set. It is determined whether or not the number of games corresponding to the precursor counter set in the setting process has not been exhausted yet. When the precursor counter is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter is executed in step S1509. Then, in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0.

When the precursor counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S1511 to clear the precursor flag. Then, in step S1512, an AT type determination process is performed to determine whether the AT mode type this time is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. Such a process is a process corresponding to the process of step S1115. That is, in the AT type determination process of step S1512, for example, according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, etc., or randomly, the current AT mode type Will be decided by lottery. The AT type determination process in step S1115 and the AT type determination process in step S1512 may have different selectivity between the first AT mode and the second AT mode. For example, step S1512 is higher than the process in step S1115. The processing of may have a configuration in which the selection rate of the second AT mode is higher.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode is determined as the processing result of step S1512. When the mode is determined as the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT notification flag is executed in step S1514, and the process of setting the first AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1515. After that, the game number management process is terminated. By setting the first AT notification flag, the process for generating the push order notification for the second re-game winning is performed in the above-mentioned push order notification process. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first AT winning notification command will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1513 that the AT mode to be transferred this time is not the first AT mode but the second AT mode, the process of setting the notification flag for the second AT is executed in step S1516, and the second AT is executed in step S1517. After executing the process of setting the winning notification command as the output target to the display control device 81, the game number management process is terminated. By setting the second AT notification flag, the process for generating the push order notification for the third re-game winning is performed in the above-mentioned push order notification process. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second AT winning notification command will be described in detail later.

In the second game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and in either BB state. If there is, the second game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, if the transition to the second BB state is caused in the 2-bet game, the number of games in the AT mode is not managed. If it is not in any BB state, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the AT counter is larger than 0 and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is larger than 0.

If the AT counter is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter is executed in step S1603. Then, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the AT counter has become 0, and if it becomes 0, a process of clearing the AT mode flag is executed in step S1605. Then, in step S1606, a process of setting the AT end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the AT end command will be described in detail later. If the AT counter is 0 in step S1602, or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1604, the second game number management process is terminated as it is.

After executing the process of step S1606, the third CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S1607, the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step S1608, and the third CZ mode game number lottery process is performed in step S1609. 3 Execute the process of setting the CZ mode flag. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode ends, the game shifts to the CZ mode, and the CZ mode that shifts when the AT mode ends is set to the third CZ mode, and the number of games is set to step S1607. It is determined by the lottery process. In the lottery process for the number of third CZ mode games, the third CZ mode game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of games in the third CZ mode this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the third CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 25 games to 30 games is selected. For example, 30 games are easily selected, while 25 games are selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to play. For example, when 30 games are selected in the third CZ mode game number lottery process, 30 is input to the CZ counter in step S1608.

After setting the third CZ mode flag in step S1609, the process of setting the third CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1610. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the third CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the winning result correspondence process, after executing the game number management process of step S1403 and step S1404, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the 1st AT start flag is a flag set in the game in which the 2nd re-game winning is possible when the transition to the 1st AT mode occurs, and more specifically, the 1st AT notification flag is used. This is a flag that is set at the start of a game that normally wins Lip B in the set situation. That is, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. When the first AT start flag is set, the process of clearing the first AT start flag is cleared in step S1406, and the process of setting the first AT flag in various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1407. As described above, by setting the first AT flag, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the first AT is performed.

When it is determined in step S1405 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the second AT start flag is a flag set in the game in which the third re-game winning is possible when the transition to the second AT mode is caused, and more specifically, the second AT notification flag is set. This is a flag that is set at the start of a game that normally wins Lip C in the set situation. That is, the second AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. When the second AT start flag is set, the second AT start flag is cleared in step S1409, and the process of setting the second AT flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1410. If it is determined in step S1408 that the second AT start flag is not set, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is. As described above, by setting the second AT flag, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the second AT is performed.

After executing the process of step S1407 or step S1410, the process of inputting 50 to the above AT counter is executed in step S1411. As described above, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and in the present embodiment, 50 games are set as the initial number of games in either the first AT mode or the second AT mode. The number of initial games may be different between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or the number of initial games may be determined by lottery. In this case, the number of initial games may be larger in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In step S1412, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed, and in step S1413, a process of setting the AT mode flag is executed. Then, in step S1414, a process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the winning result is terminated. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the AT start command will be described in detail later.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, the section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, shifting to the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The first section display process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41 and based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case where at least a specific section in which the notification condition in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied, among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, in step S1703, a process of adding 1 to the normal counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The normal counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games started as a normal section instead of an advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S1703, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. When the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1705. Then, in step S1706, the process of setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1707, processing is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, and more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e. As described above, the advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1708, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is executed.

In the advantageous section transition game process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, the first CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S1801, and the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step S1802. Then, in step S1803, the process of setting the first CZ mode flag is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the CZ mode is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered, the first CZ mode is set, and the number of games is the lottery process of step S1801. Determined by. In the lottery process for the number of first CZ mode games, the first CZ mode game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of games in the first CZ mode this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the first CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 8 games to 10 games is selected, and 8 games and 9 games are easy to select, while 10 games are easy to select. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to select. For example, when 10 games are selected in the first CZ mode game number lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step S1802.

After setting the first CZ mode flag in step S1803, the process of setting the first CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1804. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1805, the ceiling game number lottery process is executed. In the ceiling game number lottery process, a ceiling game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of ceiling games this time is randomly determined. In the ceiling game number table, the number of games that are easy to select (for example, 341 and 682) and the number of games that are difficult to select or are not selected are set within a range that does not exceed the maximum number of ceiling games (999 games in this embodiment). .. Further, in the ceiling game number table, the minimum number of games is set to 100 games, and during the first CZ mode set at the time of transition to the advantageous section (more specifically, during the precursor mode when the AT mode transition is won during the first CZ mode). It is set not to reach the ceiling game.

In step S1806, a process of inputting the number of ceiling games to the ceiling counter is executed based on the process result of step S1805. After that, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is terminated.

Returning to the description of the section display first process, after executing the process for the advantageous section transition game in step S1708, or when it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous section flag is set, any one of them is performed in step S1709. It is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag or the AT mode flag is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell can be performed in the AT mode or the CZ mode, and the situation in which any of these flags is set is defined as the situation. It can be said that the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. When any of the flags is set, the display of the section indicator is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8 in step S1710.

When it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, the process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is executed in step S1711. Specifically, in step S1711, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is performed. That is, the process for ending the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

Even when it is determined in step S1704 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, or even when the advantageous section flag or the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the CZ mode flag is set. If the or AT mode flag is not set and the mode is normal, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the display start processing of the section display in step S1710 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1712 or step S1713, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1714. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the addition value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1715, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1714 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units including seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and the individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, the combination monitor 77 can display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) individually, and in particular, the combination monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1715, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1714 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e on the combination monitor 77 display a four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Display control is performed. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 digits after the decimal point, for example, "0.5012". The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1715, the section display first process is terminated.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing of step S1714, the display control of the combination ratio monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the number of the fifth digit after the decimal point. Further, among the role ratio monitors 77, the first display unit 77a basically displays "0", so that the first display unit 77a is not provided, the first display unit 77a is printed, and the like. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (Processing for winning results) will be performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, the process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S1902. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. After executing the process of step S1902, in step S1903, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1903, the number of inserted sheets (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. By adding to, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S1903, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1904, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1905. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the number of advantageous section games AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section), the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode), the CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode), and the precursor counter (precursor). Whether or not the total number of games remaining in the mode) is greater than the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is grasped. Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is calculated from the increase / decrease number in the advantageous section. Understand whether there are many situations. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1906, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games 1500, or whether or not the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S1907, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1908, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1909, a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed, and in step S1910, a process of clearing the normal counter is performed, and then the second process of displaying this section is performed. To finish.

Regarding the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S1909, more specifically, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time, and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time. Is a process to return to the initial value. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, the various CZ mode flags, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY, the precursor counter for the precursor mode, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode, etc. are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and the RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters. It is a process to perform.

If it is determined in step S1906 that the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1911 and the CZ end game flag is set. Determine if it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in various CZ modes, the CZ mode flag is cleared when the AT mode winning flag is set (steps S808 to S810). The CZ end game flag is a flag set when the number of remaining games (CZ counter) in the CZ mode becomes 0 while the CZ mode flag is set. Therefore, when the CZ end game flag is set, it means that the CZ mode has ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

When the CZ mode end game flag is set in step S1911, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not the second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set.

The second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set in step S1912, and is set as a trigger for the second CZ mode set when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the advantageous section or when the AT mode ends. If the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1907 and the process for ending the advantageous section is executed. On the other hand, in step S1912, the first CZ mode flag is set instead of the second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag, and the first CZ mode set in the wake of the advantageous section transition wins the AT mode transition lottery. If it ends without doing so, the process proceeds to step S1913, the first CZ mode flag is cleared, and then the second process of displaying this section is ended.

That is, when the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section ends, while the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. , The advantageous section continues without ending. The second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag are cleared at the time of the process for ending the advantageous section (step S1909).

<Advantageous section and display mode>
The relationship between the advantageous section and the display mode will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, an advantageous section in which push order notification can occur and a normal section in which push order notification does not occur are set, and a situation in which the advantageous section flag is set is an advantageous section. , The situation where the advantageous section flag is not set is the normal section. The advantageous section flag is a flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. For example, the initialization process of the RAM 106 is performed when the set value of the slot machine 10 is changed (the winning probability is changed). Therefore, the advantageous section flag is also cleared. That is, when the set value is changed and the power is turned on, the game starts from the normal section. In the normal section, the display mode is set to the normal mode in which the push order notification does not occur.

If you win the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section will occur. More specifically, the advantageous section winning game flag is set by winning the advantageous section transition lottery process, and the advantageous section flag is set on condition that the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the section display first process. To. Then, in the process of setting the advantageous section flag, the process for the advantageous section transition game is executed, and in the process for the advantageous section transition game, the process for setting the display mode to the first CZ mode is performed. In addition, the number of ceiling games (maximum 999 games) is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section.

In the first CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 10 games, and during the first CZ mode, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode can be won with high probability. If the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won in the first CZ mode, the transition to the AT mode occurs mainly via the precursor mode. On the other hand, if the first CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode. However, in this case, the advantageous section does not end.

When the section is advantageous and the display mode is the normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery is executed together with the AT mode transition lottery. If the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the second CZ mode.

In the second CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 15 games, and like the first CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set so that the lottery for transition to the AT mode can be won with high probability. ing. If the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won in the second CZ mode, the transition to the AT mode occurs mainly via the precursor mode. On the other hand, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and further, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

The AT mode is a mode in which push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is generated when the push order bell is won, and a large number of medals can be expected to increase. When the push order notification is generated after shifting to the AT mode, it becomes possible to establish the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination at the time of winning each push order bell, and per game in the AT mode. The net increase is about 8.04 plus. In the AT mode, the initial number of games is set to 50, and by winning the additional lottery, the remaining number of games is added. In addition, the probability of winning the additional lottery is set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the AT mode ends and the third CZ mode is set.

In the third CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 25 to 30 games, and even during the third CZ mode, as in the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode, the lottery for transition to the AT mode can be won with high probability. Is set to. If the lottery for transition to AT mode is won in the third CZ mode, the transition to AT mode occurs. On the other hand, when the third CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and further, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

As described above, in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery using the CZ AT mode transition lottery table is executed in each game, and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table is AT rather than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. It is set so that it will be easy to win the mode transition. Further, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is configured to determine the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery by using the point values acquired in each game of the CZ mode. Then, from the point that the lottery for shifting to each game AT mode is executed in the CZ mode and the point value can be obtained in each game in the CZ mode, the longer the number of games is set to the CZ mode, the more the AT mode shifts. It can be said that it is easy to win the lottery. That is, the second CZ mode is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the first CZ mode, and the third CZ mode is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the second CZ mode.

Then, although the 1st CZ mode is less likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode, the advantageous section ends if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first CZ mode, the advantageous section does not end. Therefore, from the viewpoint of continuity of the advantageous section, the first CZ mode is the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode. It is more advantageous for the player than.

<About the display of the push order display and the section display and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 50, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification.

In the normal section, for example, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won by winning the 7th small role (watermelon), the game shifts to the advantageous section in the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established, and the game is started. The measurement of the number of executed games in the advantageous section (counting the number of games in the advantageous section AG) is started. As described above, the first CZ mode is set at the time of the advantageous section transition, and the push order notification may occur in the first CZ mode. Therefore, the section display is displayed in the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game). Assuming that the start condition of is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 lights up. More specifically, at the start of the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game) (when the start lever 41 is operated), the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game (timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the final reel are pressed). ) Ends the display. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. The conditions for ending the advantageous section include that the number of continuous games and the number of medals increased reach the upper limit, and in this embodiment, the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode are terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery. It has been. When the advantageous section ends, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the section display second process which is the process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation (timing when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the final reel is completed). do.

As described above, the push order notification can be generated by shifting to the advantageous section, and the transition to the advantageous section (shift to a specific section) and the end of the advantageous section are notified by the eighth display segment N8. Be clearly notified. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is lit, it is clearly understood that the situation is such that at least the benefits of the push order notification can be enjoyed (specific section, substantial increase section). It is possible. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the push order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the push order notification is illegally enjoyed even though it is not an advantageous section. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being performed.

On the other hand, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode of the CZ modes ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, not only the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode but also the advantageous section ends. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is turned off, so that the player can clearly grasp that the advantageous section has ended. In other words, by turning off the eighth display segment N8, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode.

Then, there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated more often based on the fact that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off. Further, the game table in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off also serves as a mark that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the immediately preceding second CZ mode or third CZ mode. Therefore, for example, the transition of the predecessor. The act of picking up the winning lottery is also less likely to occur, and in any case, turning off the eighth display segment N8 may be one of the causes of the decrease in the operating rate of the game console. Therefore, the slot machine 10 has a characteristic configuration for eliminating the decrease in the operating rate due to the extinguishing of the eighth display segment N8. The configuration will be described below.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2002, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S2001, or after the process of step S2002 is executed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of the normal process. If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current bet operation is executed in step S2004.

When a negative determination is made in step S2003, or after the process of step S2004 is executed, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and corresponds to the lottery result in addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process. Precursor command set in processing (FIG. 30) and section display first processing (FIG. 46), 1st AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd CZ mode start command, addition command, push order notification command , 1st CZ mode start command and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S2006.

When a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the process of step S2006 is executed, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). It is a stop command command set by. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, in step S2008, each stop operation effect setting process for performing the effect setting based on the current stop operation is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2007, or after the process of step S2008 is executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, there are AT start command, CZ end command, first AT winning notification command, second AT winning notification command, AT end command, third CZ mode start command, etc. set in the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 43). In the case of these commands at the time of total stop, the effect setting process at the time of total stop is executed in step S2010.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2011, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timings. Further, in step S2011, the setting of the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than the bet time, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) is set, and the main control device 101 is not used. Settings for effects based on signals from sensors connected to (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described. In addition, in the description of each effect setting process, it will be described with reference to the schematic views and the like of the display effect of FIGS. 58 to 64.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S2006 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal rip B. When the push order notification command is set in the game which is the normal rip B, it means that the game is the start game of the first AT mode. In this case, the push order corresponding to the second replay winning in step S2104. Execute the setting process for performing the notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal lip C. When the push order notification command is set in the game which is the normal rip C, it means that the game is the start game of the second AT mode. In this case, the push order corresponding to the third replay winning in step S2106. Execute the setting process for performing the notification effect.

The case of making a negative judgment in step S2105 means that the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning, and in this case, it corresponds to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination in step S2107. The setting for performing the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the lottery result of the current game is not the push order winning combination, it is determined in step S2108 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the specific winning combination. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, chance eyes A to chance eyes C, cherry A to cherry C, and Watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition winning is more likely to be triggered by the lottery result other than the specific combination. If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the specific combination notification process is executed in step S2109. In the specific combination notification process, a setting is executed so that the specific combination notification that the lottery result of this game is one of the above specific combinations is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. As the specific combination notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), three characters of the exclamation mark are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. The production is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102 or step S2108, or after the processing of step S2104, step S2106, step S2107 or step S2109 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2110. In step S2110, it is determined whether or not the addition command is received. When the addition command is received, the addition effect setting process is executed in step S2111. In the setting process of the additional effect, the additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed as a notification corresponding to the addition of the remaining number of games in the AT mode. The mode of the addition effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the addition is performed, and for example, the number of addition games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the addition is performed. The aspect may be included, or for example, the so-called post-addition effect in which the addition effect is executed in a situation where the number of remaining games in the AT mode is a predetermined number (for example, the remaining one game) may include the aspect. ..

When a negative determination is made in step S2110, or after the process of step S2111 is executed, it is determined in step S2112 whether or not the first AT winning immediate notification command or the second AT winning immediate notification command is received. The first AT winning immediate notification command and the second AT winning immediate notification command are commands output from the main control device 101 when the AT mode transition lottery is won and the immediate notification lottery is won. When these commands are received, the setting for causing the corresponding AT winning immediate notification effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2113. The content of the AT winning immediate notification effect will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2112, or after the process of step S2113 is executed, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2114, and the CZ mode setting process is executed in step S2115. Then, after executing other start-time effect setting processes in step S2116, the main start-time effect setting process ends. In step S2116, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process for turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is performed.

Hereinafter, the continuous effect setting process in step S2114 and the CZ mode setting process in step S2115 will be described.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous production is a series of productions that are continuously or intermittently executed over a plurality of games. In the present embodiment, in particular, the continuous production is performed in the game from the transition to the CZ mode to the notification of the lottery result of the AT mode transition lottery. Prior to the description of the continuous effect setting process, the outline of the continuous effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65.

In the continuous production in the present embodiment, first, the first preparation effect is executed, then the second preparation effect is executed, and then the battle effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is finally executed. The first preparatory production and the second preparatory production are productions in which the main character prepares for the battle production. As shown in FIG. 65, the continuous effect is set to continue for a maximum of 30 games, the first preparatory effect is set to about 15 games, the second preparatory effect is set to about 10 games, and the battle effect is 5. It is set in the game. When the continuous production is started, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in the battle production through the first preparation production and the second preparation production.

Regarding the first preparatory effect, specifically, an effect is set in which the main character searches for a weapon to be used in the battle. For example, as shown in FIG. 61A, in the start game of the first preparation effect, a character display such as "Prepare for battle !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a continuous start effect. For example, the continuous effect is executed at the start of the continuous effect and at the time of operating the start lever 41. After the continuous start effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 61 (b1) to 61 (b3), a character display such as "equipment time!" Is displayed as the first preparation start effect. The first preparation start production has different production modes depending on the degree of expectation that the continuous production will eventually become a winning production, and for example, assistance is provided so that the player can clearly grasp the difference in the production mode. The color of the background screen of the display unit 65 is set to be different.

As described above, the expectation of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the number of continuous games in the CZ mode. In this embodiment, the continuous production is triggered by the first CZ mode in which 5 to 10 games are set. Is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the first preparation start effect A is executed with a white background color. Further, when the continuous production is started triggered by the second CZ mode in which 8 games to 15 games are set, the first preparation start production B is performed with a yellow background color as shown in FIG. 61 (b2). Will be executed. Then, when the continuous production is started triggered by the third CZ mode in which 25 to 30 games are set, the first preparation start production C is performed with a red background color as shown in FIG. 61 (b3). Will be executed. In the figure, the difference in background color is expressed by the difference in hatch. That is, the player expects that the first preparation start effect C is performed when the first preparation start effect is executed.

In the first preparatory production, as a weapon discovery production in which the main character searches for a weapon to be used in the battle, a treasure box production (FIGS. 62 (a1) and 62 (a2)) for discovering a treasure box containing weapons and the like and a treasure box A confirmation effect (FIGS. 62 (b1) to 62 (b3)) for confirming the contents is set. The treasure chest effect and the confirmation effect are effects executed according to the lottery result of the game in which the first preparation effect is executed. For example, the treasure box effect is executed at the start of the game, and the confirmation effect is executed at the end of the game. To. In this embodiment, for example, a machine gun, a knife, and a picopico hammer are set as weapons that can be found by the main character, and when a machine gun is found, the expectation that the continuous production will finally end as a victory production is the highest. If you do not find a picopico hammer or any weapon, the expectation that the continuous production will eventually end as a victory production is set to be low.

The treasure chest effect is set to the treasure box effect A in FIG. 62 (a1) and the treasure box effect B in FIG. 62 (a2) according to the probability that a weapon with a high expectation of winning is accommodated. The treasure chest effect B is set so that the probability that a weapon with a high expectation is contained is higher than that of the treasure box effect A. The display mode is different so that the player can clearly grasp which of the treasure box effect A and the treasure box effect B is, and in this embodiment, the color of the treasure box is set to be different. More specifically, in the treasure chest effect A, a yellow treasure box is displayed, and in the treasure box effect B, a red treasure box is displayed (in the figure, the difference in color is expressed by a dot hatch). That is, when the treasure box effect is performed, the player expects the treasure box effect B to be executed.

In the confirmation effect, the effect that the weapon pops out from the treasure box is set, and the confirmation effect A in which the picopico hammer pops out in FIG. 62 (b1), the confirmation effect B in which the knife in FIG. 62 (b2) pops out, and the confirmation effect B in FIG. 62 (b3). Confirmation effect C that the machine gun pops out is set.

As described above, the weapon discovery effect is an effect executed according to the lottery result of the game. For example, if the lottery result of this game is a result that the AT mode transition lottery is easy to win, the treasure box effect A Also, the treasure box effect B is easy to select, and the confirmation effect C is easier to select than the confirmation effect A and the confirmation effect B. More specifically, in the CZ mode, the details of the weapon discovery effect are determined according to the cumulative counter RC, and the larger the value of the cumulative counter RC, the higher the expectation that the weapon discovery effect will be a victory effect. Is determined.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned weapon discovery effect is configured such that a treasure box effect is generated as an effect at the start of the game, and a confirmation effect is generated as an effect at each stop of the game.

As each stop effect, the first stop ON operation effect at the stop ON operation of the first reel (the timing when the press operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is performed) and the first stop ON operation effect and the first reel The effect of the first stop OFF operation at the stop OFF operation (timing when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is completed) and the stop ON operation of the second reel (the reel to be stopped second). The effect of the second stop ON operation at the timing when the press operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the above is performed, and the stop OFF operation of the second reel (the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reel to be stopped second). The second stop OFF operation effect at the timing when the pressing operation is completed) and the stop ON operation of the third reel (the timing when the pressing operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reel to be stopped last are performed). There are three stop ON operation effects and a third stop OFF operation effect at the stop OFF operation of the third reel (the timing when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reel to be stopped last is completed). ..

When the confirmation effect C, which has a high expectation of winning the AT mode, occurs, the effect at the time of the first stop ON operation → the effect at the time of the first stop OFF operation → the effect at the time of the second stop ON operation → the effect at the time of the second stop OFF operation → the first When the generation timing is selected so that the selection rate increases in the order of 3 stop ON operation effect → 3 stop OFF operation effect, and the confirmation effect A with low expectation of AT mode transition winning occurs, the third Select rate in the order of stop OFF operation effect → 3rd stop ON operation effect → 2nd stop OFF operation effect → 2nd stop ON operation operation effect → 1st stop OFF operation operation effect → 1st stop ON operation operation effect The timing of occurrence is selected so that That is, when the treasure box effect occurs at the start of the game, the later the timing at which the confirmation effect occurs, the higher the possibility that the effect with high expectation of winning the AT mode transition will occur.

In the continuous effect, after the first preparatory effect is executed, the second preparatory effect is executed. Regarding the second preparatory production, specifically, a production in which the main character is enthusiastic about the battle is set. When the second preparation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), as the second preparation start effect, the main character is equipped with the weapon found in the first preparation effect, and the characters such as "departure!" The effect that the display is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed. When a plurality of weapons are found in the first preparation effect, the second preparation start effect shows that the main character is equipped with the weapon with the highest expectation among the discovered weapons.

In the second preparatory production, the fanning effect A to the fanning effect C are executed according to the degree of enthusiasm of the main character according to the degree of expectation that the battle effect will be a winning effect. In the present embodiment, of the fanning effect A shown in FIG. 63 (b1), the fanning effect B shown in FIG. 63 (b2), and the fanning effect C shown in FIG. 63 (b3), the fanning effect C is the most enthusiastic. The state of being is displayed, and the state of the fanning effect A being the least enthusiastic is displayed.

Incidentally, the fanning effects A to C are generated at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel of the game in which the fanning effects A to C are generated, and continue until the start of the next game based on the operation of the start lever 41.

In the continuous production, after the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed, the battle effect is executed. The battle effect is executed over 5 games, the main character and the enemy character are displayed in the first game, the appearance of the main character attacking in the second game is displayed (FIG. 64 (a)), and the third game is displayed. The appearance of the enemy characters attacking is displayed (FIG. 64 (b)), and the appearance of attacking each other is displayed in the fourth game. Then, in the fifth game, which is the final game, the winning effect shown in FIG. 64 (c1) is executed, so that it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. Further, in the fifth game, which is the final game, the defeat effect shown in FIG. 64 (c2) is executed, so that it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous production is basically started with the transition to each CZ mode. In this case, although the setting method of the continuous effect differs depending on the type of the CZ mode to be transferred (the opportunity to shift to the CZ mode), the effect content of the continuous effect, the number of games to be executed of the continuous effect, etc. are the types of the CZ mode. It is set to be common regardless.

For example, in a continuous effect started with the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode as an opportunity, the first preparatory effect is executed until the end of the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode, and the second CZ mode or the second CZ mode ends. Set the production after the preparation production. On the other hand, in the continuous production started with the third CZ mode as an opportunity, the first preparation effect is executed until the middle of the third CZ mode, and when the first preparation effect ends, the continuous effect ends with the end of the third CZ mode. The production after the second preparation production is set so as to be performed. In this case, the continuous effect started with the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode as a trigger is a continuous effect that is continuously executed even after the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode ends, and starts with the third CZ mode as an opportunity. The continuous effect to be performed is a continuous effect completed during the third CZ mode.

As described above, the first CZ mode is the CZ mode set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. Then, depending on whether the end of the previous advantageous section is triggered by the end of the second CZ mode or the end of the third CZ mode, whether the continuous production is executed at the time of transition to the advantageous section. Whether or not (whether or not the continuous production has already been completed) will be different. Then, when the end of the previous advantageous section is triggered by the end of the second CZ mode, the second CZ mode is used as a trigger instead of starting a new continuous effect triggered by the first CZ mode. It is configured to continue the continuous production.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the CZ modes having different transition triggers can overlap through the continuous production, and in such a configuration, the production content of each continuous production and the number of games to be executed for the continuous production. Etc. are realized in common. Hereinafter, the process will be described in detail.

In the continuous effect setting process, as shown in FIG. 53, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is received. As described above, the precursor command is a case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process (FIG. 29) on the main control device 101 side, and is not won in the immediate notification lottery (step S1105: NO). ) This is a command output in the case, and in addition to the information that the AT mode winning flag is set, the number of games from the game (the game in which the AT mode winning flag is set) to the game for which the AT winning notification effect should be performed. Information (value of precursor counter) is included. When the precursor command is received, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not the pseudo precursor flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The pseudo precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect that is the defeat effect should be executed, and is a flag set when the continuous effect is started without receiving the precursor command. That is, when the precursor command is received in step S2201 and the pseudo precursor flag is set in step S2202, the AT mode transition lottery is entered after starting the continuous effect which is the defeat effect. It means that you have won and received the precursory command. The processing in this case will be described in detail later, and here, the processing when the pseudo precursor flag is not set will be described. That is, if the pseudo precursor flag is not set in step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2203, a process of setting a precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed. The precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a continuous effect that is a victory effect should be executed. After that, in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the first CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The first CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that it is in the first CZ mode, and is set when the first CZ mode start command output from the main control device 101 is received at the start of the first CZ mode. To. Incidentally, the second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag are provided in addition to the first CZ mode flag, and when the second CZ mode start command is received from the main control unit 101, the second CZ mode flag is set and the second CZ mode flag is set. When the 3CZ mode start command is received, the third CZ mode flag is set.

When the first CZ mode flag is not set in step S2204 and the second CZ mode, the third CZ mode, or the normal mode is in progress, the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 in step S2205 is a precursor. The process of inputting the value of the precursor counter included in the command, that is, the value corresponding to the number of games until the winning notification of winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is executed is executed. The continuous effect counter is subtracted by 1 for each game, and the AT winning notification effect is executed in the game where the value becomes 0.

On the other hand, when the first CZ mode flag is set in step S2204 and the first CZ mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not the precursor start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. .. The precursor start flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect has shifted to the second preparatory effect. If the precursor start flag is not set, the process of setting the immediate notification flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2207. When the immediate notification flag is set, even during the continuous production, the winning notification that the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won is performed without going through the winning effect. The content and processing of the winning notification when the immediate notification flag is set will be described in detail later.

If the precursor command has not been received in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the first CZ mode start command or the second CZ mode start command is received. If any of the CZ mode start commands has been received, the CZ start setting process is executed in step S2209. The CZ start setting process is a process for setting an effect at the start of the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode. As already explained, the first CZ mode is set when shifting to the advantageous section, the second CZ mode is set when the CZ mode transition lottery is won, and the corresponding CZ mode start command is set at the start of the game. It is output. On the other hand, the third CZ mode is set when the AT mode ends, and the third CZ mode start command is output at the end of the game. Therefore, the process of setting the effect at the start of the third CZ mode is performed in the effect setting process at the time of all stop (step S2010).

<Setting process for starting CZ>
In the CZ start setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, it is determined in step S2301 whether or not the second CZ mode start command is received. When the second CZ mode start command is received and the CZ mode to be started this time is the second CZ mode, the second CZ mode flag is set in step S2302. Then, after executing the setting process of the CZ start effect in step S2303, the setting process for the present CZ start is terminated. In the setting process of the CZ start effect, the above continuous start effect (FIG. 61 (a)) is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and subsequently, the first preparation start effect B corresponding to the current CZ mode (FIG. 61 (a)). The effect setting is performed so that FIG. 61 (b2)) is performed.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the first CZ mode start command is received instead of the second CZ mode start command, the process of setting the first CZ mode flag is executed in step S2304. Then, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a after the end of the second CZ. As described above, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section may end when the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends, and the flag after the end of the second CZ indicates that the end of the previous advantageous section ends the second CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that it was triggered by. That is, it is determined whether or not the timing is set to the first CZ mode when the advantageous section ends at the end of the second CZ mode and then re-shifts to the advantageous section.

If the flag is not set after the end of the second CZ, the process of setting the CZ start effect is executed in step S2306, and then the CZ start setting process is terminated. More specifically, when setting the start effect of the first CZ mode, as the start effect of this game, the continuous start effect of FIG. 61 (a) is set to be performed, and the effect at the time of all stop of this game is set. As a result, the first preparation start effect A of FIG. 61 (b1) is set to be performed. The case where the flag is set after the end of the second CZ in step S2305 will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the continuous effect setting process, after executing any of the processes of step S2205, step S2207 and step S2209, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2206 or a negative determination is made in step S2208, the process proceeds to step S2210. move on. In step S2210, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag or the pseudo precursor flag is set. If any of the flags is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is executed in step S2211. Then, in step S2212, it is determined whether or not the precursor start flag is set.

As described above, the case where the precursor start flag is set indicates a situation in which the continuous production is shifting to the second preparation effect, and in the present embodiment, when the transition to the second preparation effect is performed, the second preparation effect is performed. 2 It is configured to set a series of production data from preparation production to battle production. More specifically, at the time of transition to the second preparatory production, the content of the battle production is determined based on the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery, and the production table for continuous production according to the content is set from various table storage areas 182a. .. In the effect table for continuous effect, the effect data to be executed in each game is set according to the value of the continuous effect counter. Then, in the continuous effect after the second preparatory effect, the effect data is set based on the set effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like. There is. The process of setting the effect table for continuous effect will be described in detail later, but here, the process for setting the effect data of continuous effect will be described based on the effect table that has already been set.

That is, when the precursor start flag is set in step S2212 and the effect table for continuous effect has already been set, the address information of the set effect table is grasped in step S2213. Then, in step S2214, the effect data to be executed in this game is set from the grasped address information of the effect table and the continuous effect counter.

For example, when setting the effect data of the game in the second preparatory effect, in step S2214, it is confirmed whether or not any of the fanning effects A to C is generated in this game, and the fanning effects A to C are generated. In this case, the effect data is set so that the corresponding fanning effects A to C are generated as the effect when the game is completely stopped (the effect when the stop OFF operation of the third reel is performed). As described above, the fanning effects A to C generated as the all-stop effect are set to continue until the start of the next game based on the operation of the start lever 41.

After executing the process of step S2214, it is determined in step S2215 whether or not the continuous effect counter becomes 0. If it becomes 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag and the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step S2216, and then the continuous effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in any of step S2210, step S2212, and step S2215, the continuous effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Setting processing in CZ mode>
The CZ mode setting process of step S2115 in the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.

In step S2401, one of the CZ mode flags is set, and it is determined whether or not the CZ mode is in progress. If none of the CZ mode flags are set, the setting process during the CZ mode is terminated as it is. If any of the CZ mode flags is set, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the third CZ mode flag is set. When the 3rd CZ mode flag is set and the 3rd CZ mode is in progress, the precursor start flag is set in step S2403, and the process shifts to the 2nd preparatory production in the continuous production triggered by the 3rd CZ mode. Determine if it is. If the precursor start flag is not set, in step S2404, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the third CZ mode, the continuous effect is set to start at the start of the third CZ mode, and the continuous effect ends at the end of the third CZ mode. The first preparation effect, the second preparation effect, and the battle effect are executed.

The CZ effect counter to be subtracted in step S2404 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games of the first preparation effect in the third CZ mode. After subtracting 1 from the CZ effect counter, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the CZ effect counter becomes 0. If the CZ effect counter is not 0 in step S2405, or if the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode is in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2406, and the first preparation effect is executed in steps S2406 to S2410. Perform the processing for.

That is, in step S2406, a process of acquiring a weapon discovery effect table from various table storage areas 182a is executed. Then, in step S2407, the set CZ mode flag is confirmed, and the process of grasping the type of the CZ mode is executed. In the following step S2408, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game and the value of the cumulative counter RC is executed based on the lottery result command received this time. Then, in step S2409, this game is based on the weapon discovery effect table acquired in step S2406, the type of CZ mode grasped in step S2407, the lottery result of the game grasped in step S2408, and the cumulative counter RC. Determine whether or not to generate the weapon discovery effect, the content when it is generated (especially the type of confirmation effect), and the timing of occurrence of the confirmation effect, and set the determined effect content as the effect content of this game. After performing the processing, the setting processing during this CZ mode is terminated. By performing such processing, for example, a treasure box effect is generated as an effect at the start of the current game, and a confirmation effect is generated as an effect at each stop of the current game.

As shown in FIG. 66, the weapon discovery effect table is a confirmation effect of whether or not a weapon discovery effect is generated and when a weapon discovery effect is generated, depending on the type of CZ mode, the lottery result of this game, and the cumulative counter RC. The type and is set. More specifically, the larger the value of the cumulative counter RC and the more difficult the lottery result of this game is to win, the more likely it is that the weapon discovery effect will occur, and if it does occur, the confirmation effect C (machine gun). The selection rate is set to be high. Further, when comparing the first CZ mode to the third CZ mode, even if the same cumulative counter RC value and the same lottery result are obtained, the third CZ mode is most likely to generate the weapon discovery effect, and the confirmation effect C is selected when it occurs. The rate is set to be high, and the second CZ mode is set so that the weapon discovery effect is most unlikely to occur, and even if it does occur, the selection rate of the confirmation effect C is low.

In step S2408, after the weapon discovery effect is generated and the type of the confirmation effect is determined, the generation timing of the confirmation effect is determined by lottery according to the type of the confirmation effect, and at the start of the game. The type of treasure chest effect to be executed is determined by lottery. In this case, as described above, the more the confirmation effect with high expectation of AT mode transition winning is selected, the easier it is to select a late timing as each stop effect, and the higher the expectation of AT mode transition lottery. The more the effect is selected, the easier it is for the treasure box effect B to be selected as the treasure box effect at the start of the game.

If it is determined in step S2405 that the CZ effect counter is 0 in the third CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, a process of setting the precursor start flag is executed, and in step S2411, a process of inputting the remaining number of games in the CZ mode to the continuous effect counter is executed. By these processes, the continuous effect in the third CZ mode shifts from the first preparatory effect to the second preparatory effect. Then, in step S2412, the precursor flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the precursor command has already been received. If the precursor flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2413 to execute a process of acquiring the precursor effect table according to the value of the continuous effect counter from various table storage areas 182a.

As the precursor effect table, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), each effect table is set according to the continuous effect counter when the second preparatory effect is started, and further, it corresponds to one continuous effect counter. Multiple types of production tables are set. For example, as an effect table in which the second preparatory effect is started when 13 is input to the continuous effect counter, an effect table in which the address information is ZA0101, an effect table in which the address information is ZA0102, and an address information are used. A plurality of effect tables such as ZA0103 and an effect table are set, and address information is set one-to-one for each effect table.

In addition, in the production table where the values of these continuous production counters are common, the number of games of the second preparation production and the battle production and the battle production are the winning productions are common, but the production contents of each game are different. It is set to be different. In particular, in the precursor effect table, the effect content in the second preparatory effect differs in each game according to the value of the continuous effect counter, and the presence or absence of each fanning effect A to C and the fanning effect A to C when they occur. Repair is uniquely defined.

In step S2413, from among the precursor effect tables set in a plurality of types for one continuous effect counter as described above, the precursor effect table to be used in this continuous effect is determined by lottery or the like. Then, in step S2414, the process of storing the address information of the determined precursor effect table in the address information storage area 183c of the RAM 183 is executed, and then the setting process during the CZ mode is terminated. By executing such a process, it is possible to set the effect data based on the precursor effect table in steps S2213 and S2214 in the continuous effect setting process.

If the precursor flag is not set in step S2412 and the precursor command is not received, the process proceeds to step S2415 to execute the process of setting the pseudo precursor flag. Then, in step S2416, a process of inputting the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode to the continuous effect counter is executed. After that, in step S2417, a process of acquiring a pseudo precursor effect table corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter is executed.

As the pseudo precursor effect table, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the effect table is set according to the continuous effect counter when the second preparatory effect is started, as in the case of the precursor effect table. , Multiple types of production tables are set corresponding to one continuous production counter. For example, as an effect table in which the second preparatory effect is started when 15 is input to the continuous effect counter, an effect table in which the address information is ZB0101, an effect table in which the address information is ZB0102, and an address information are used. A plurality of effect tables such as ZB0103 and an effect table are set, and address information is set one-to-one for each effect table.

In addition, in the production table where the values of these continuous production counters are common, the number of games of the second preparation production and the battle production and the battle production are the defeat production are common, but the production content of each game is It is set to be different. Similar to the precursor effect table, in the pseudo precursor effect table, the effect content in the second preparatory effect differs in each game according to the value of the continuous effect counter, and the presence or absence of each fanning effect A to C occurs. The repair of the fanning effects A to C is uniquely defined.

Here, in both the precursor effect table and the pseudo precursor effect table, an effect table is set in which the second preparatory effect is started when the continuous effect counter is 13 to 15. That is, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 10 in both the second preparatory effect in the continuous effect that is the victory effect and the second preparatory effect in the continuous effect that is the defeat effect. Further, in both the precursor effect table and the pseudo precursor effect table, an effect table is set in which the effect contents (the game in which the fanning effect is generated and the type of the fanning effect) are common to each game of the second preparatory effect.

That is, it is not possible to specify whether the precursor effect table or the pseudo precursor effect table is set from the number of games of the second preparation effect or the effect content in each game of the second preparation effect. .. However, in the precursor effect table, the effect table in which the fanning effect occurs frequently is easily selected in the second preparatory effect, and the effect table in which the fanning effect C (FIG. 63 (b3)) is likely to occur is selected as the type of the fanning effect. Further, in the pseudo precursor effect table, it is easy to select an effect table in which the number of times the fanning effect is generated is small in the second preparatory effect, and the fanning effect A (FIG. 63 (b1) is likely to occur as the type of the fanning effect. It is easy to select the effect table. Therefore, which of the precursor effect table and the pseudo precursor effect table is set can be determined from the number of games of the second preparation effect and the effect contents in each game of the second preparation effect. Although it cannot be specified, it is possible to predict from the contents of the second preparatory production in each game.

In step S2416, from among the pseudo precursor effect tables set in a plurality of types for one continuous effect counter as described above, the pseudo precursor effect table to be used in this continuous effect is determined by lottery or the like. Then, in step S2417, the process of storing the address information of the determined pseudo precursor effect table in the address information storage area 183c of the RAM 183 is executed, and then the setting process during the CZ mode is terminated. By executing such a process, it is possible to set the effect data based on the pseudo precursor effect table in steps S2213 and S2214 in the continuous effect setting process.

In the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 53), when a precursor command is received in a situation where the pseudo precursor flag is set (step S2201: YES, step S2202: YES), the pseudo precursor flag is cleared in step S2217. After that, in step S2218, the number of precursor games is grasped from the received precursor command, and the lottery process of the precursor effect table according to the number of precursor games is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2413. Then, in step S2219, a process of rewriting the address information of the pseudo precursor effect table input to the address information storage area 183c to the address information of the precursor effect table determined by lottery in step S2218 is executed. After that, the precursor flag is set in step S2203. As a result, the continuous effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is switched to the continuous effect using the precursor effect table.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S2010 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, AT start command, CZ end command, 1st AT winning notification command, 2nd AT winning notification command, AT end command, 3rd CZ. This is a process for setting the effect when the command is a command for stopping all, such as a mode start command.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command has been received. The first AT winning command and the second AT winning notification command are commands output from the main control device 101 side when the precursor counter becomes 0 after the AT mode winning flag is set. When these AT winning notification commands are received, the process proceeds to step S2502, and it is determined whether or not the immediate notification flag is set. As described above, the immediate notification flag is a flag set when the precursor command is received during the first CZ mode in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 53) and the precursor start flag is not set. There is (step S2207). The processing when the immediate notification flag is set will be described in detail later, and here, the processing when the immediate notification flag is not set will be described. That is, when the immediate notification flag is not set, in step S2503, the setting for performing the AT winning notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 58A, the AT winning notification effect displays characters such as "AT confirmed !!" on the auxiliary display unit 65, and outputs a corresponding sound effect from the speaker 64. In the AT winning notification effect, it is not specified whether the first AT or the second AT has been won. By doing so, it is possible not to eliminate the playability of looking forward to which AT is won until the AT start game after the AT winning notification effect. However, depending on the type of the received AT winning command, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like may be used to indicate that the first AT has been won or that the second AT has been won. ..

If it is determined in step S2501 that the AT winning notification command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the AT start command has been received. The case where the AT start command is received is the case where the push order notification effect for the second re-game or the third re-game is performed at the start of the game. In this case, in step S2505, the setting for performing the AT start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT start effect is, for example, a re-game symbol for starting corresponding to the type of AT mode to be started this time on the auxiliary display unit 65 (in the case of the first AT mode, the second re-game). Along with the diagonal alignment of the corresponding "BAR" symbols (FIG. 14 (a)), etc., and the lower alignment of the "white 7" symbols corresponding to the third replay in the second AT mode (FIG. 14 (c)), etc. Characters such as "AT start !!" are displayed, and the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

If the AT start command has not been received in step S2504, it is determined in step S2506 whether or not the AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the setting for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2507. For example, as shown in FIG. 59A, the AT end effect displays the number of continuous games in the current AT mode and the number of medals acquired in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If the AT end command has not been received in step S2506, it is determined in step S2508 whether or not the third CZ mode start command has been received. When the third CZ mode start command is received, the process for starting the effect for the third CZ mode is executed in steps S2509 to S2512. Such a process corresponds to the CZ start setting process in FIG. 54.

That is, in step S2509, first, the lottery process for the number of CZ effect games is executed. Specifically, the number of games in the 3rd CZ mode to be started this time is grasped (25 to 30 games), and the number of games for the 2nd preparation production and the battle production in the 3rd CZ mode is within the range of 13 games to 15 games. The number of CZ production games (the number of games for executing the first preparation production) is determined by lottery.

For example, if the number of games in the third CZ mode to be started this time is 25, by determining the number of CZ production games in the range of 10 to 12 games, the number of remaining games will be 13 to 15 games. If the number of games in the third CZ mode to be started this time is 30, the number of remaining games will be 13 to 15 by determining the number of CZ production games in the range of 15 to 17 games.

In step S2510, a process of inputting the value of the number of CZ effect games determined in step S2509 to the CZ effect counter is executed. As described above, in the third CZ mode, the value of the CZ effect counter is decremented by 1 for each game and becomes 0, so that the process shifts to the second preparatory effect (step S2404, step S2505, step S2510). -Step S2518). Then, in step S2511, the third CZ mode flag is set, and in step S2512, the setting for performing the CZ start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed.

The CZ start effect is as described above. In this case, after the continuous start effect of FIG. 61 (a) is performed, the first preparation start effect C of FIG. 61 (b3) is executed. .. Further, in the third CZ mode, since the CZ start effect is set at the end of the game, for example, the continuous start effect is executed as the effect when the game is completely stopped, and the first preparation start effect C is set for the game. It is good to set it to be executed as a bet effect in the next game.

When it is determined in step S2508 that the third CZ mode start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2513 whether or not the CZ mode end command has been received. When the CZ end command is received, the effect setting process for CZ end is executed in step S2514. The CZ end command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the number of continuous games (CZ counter) in the CZ mode set at the time of transition to the CZ mode becomes 0 regardless of whether or not the AT mode transition lottery is successful.

<Production setting process for CZ end>
In the effect setting process for the end of CZ in step S2514, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the third CZ mode flag is set. If the 3rd CZ mode flag is set and the trigger for setting the CZ counter to be 0 this time is the 3rd CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S2602, the process of clearing the 3rd CZ mode flag is executed, and then the present CZ ends. Ends the effect setting process for.

As described above, at the start of the third CZ mode, the number of continuous games of the first preparatory effect is set (steps S2509 to S2510), and the number of continuous games (CZ effect counter) becomes 0. , The process proceeds to the second preparation effect (step S2405, step S2410 to step S2418). In this case, if the precursor command is received before the transition to the second preparation effect, the effect settings after the second preparation effect using the precursor effect table are performed (step S2413, step S2414), and the second preparation effect is performed. If the precursory command has not been received before the transition to, the effect setting after the second preparatory effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is performed (step S2415 to step S2418). Then, when a precursor command is received during execution of the continuous effect using the pseudo precursor effect table, switching to the continuous effect using the precursor effect table is performed (steps S2217 to S2219). As described above, the case of receiving the CZ end command is the case where the number of continuous games set at the time of transition to the third CZ mode becomes 0. On the main control device 101 side, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the middle of the third CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is set as the number of precursor games (step S1113).

That is, when the number of continuous games set at the time of transition to the third CZ mode becomes 0, the number of precursor games also becomes 0 at the same time, and the AT mode winning notification effect may be performed, or the AT mode transition lottery is won. In the former case, each AT winning notification command is output in the game. Then, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the third CZ mode and the precursor mode is transitioned, the continuous effect using the precursor effect table is performed as described above, and in this case, the victory effect (FIG. 64). After (c1)) is executed, the AT winning notification effect will be performed (step S2503). On the other hand, when the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is performed as described above, and in this case, the defeat effect (FIG. 64 (FIG. 64). c2)) is executed, the third CZ mode is terminated, the AT winning notification effect is not executed, and it becomes possible to grasp that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won.

If the third CZ mode flag is not set in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not the second CZ mode flag is set. When the second CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode that triggered the setting of the CZ counter to be 0 this time is the second CZ mode, the process of clearing the second CZ mode flag is executed in step S2604. In the following step S2605, a process of setting the precursor start flag is executed. That is, in the second CZ mode, the CZ counter set at the time of transition to the second CZ mode becomes 0, so that the continuous effect started with the second CZ mode as a trigger shifts from the first preparation effect to the second preparation effect. It is configured to be.

In step S2606, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where it is determined in step S2606 that the precursor flag is not set is the case where the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. In this case, in step S2607, the process of setting the pseudo precursor flag is executed. Then, in step S2608, a process of inputting a predetermined number (15) predetermined to the continuous effect counter is executed. In the following step S2609, the effect table corresponding to the predetermined number is determined from the pseudo precursor effect table by lottery or the like. Such a process is a process corresponding to the above step S2417. After that, similarly to step S2418, in step S2610, a process of storing the address information of the determined pseudo precursor effect table in the address information storage area 183c is executed. By executing such a process, it is possible to set the effect data based on the pseudo precursor effect table in steps S2213 and S2214 in the continuous effect setting process.

The case where the precursor flag is set in step S2606 is the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode. In this case, the precursor set on the main control device 101 side as described above. A value corresponding to the number of games is input to the continuous effect counter (step S2205). Therefore, when the precursor flag is set, the value of the continuous effect counter is grasped in step S2612, and the effect table corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter is determined from the precursor effect table by lottery or the like in step S2613. .. Such a process is a process corresponding to the above step S2413. After that, in the same manner as in step S2414, in step S2614, the process of storing the address information of the determined precursor effect table in the address information storage area 183c is executed, and then the effect setting process for the end of the CZ is terminated. By executing such a process, it is possible to set the effect data based on the precursor effect table in steps S2213 and S2214 in the continuous effect setting process. After executing the process of step S2614, the effect setting process for ending the CZ is terminated.

After executing the process of step S2413, the process of setting the flag after the end of the second CZ in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2414. The flag after the end of the second CZ is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous production is continued after the end of the second CZ mode. After executing the process of step S2414, the effect setting process for ending the CZ is terminated.

The case where it is determined in step S2603 that the second CZ mode flag is not set is the case where the first CZ mode flag is set. If the first CZ mode flag is set and the trigger for setting the CZ counter to be 0 this time is the first CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S2615 and the process of clearing the first CZ mode flag is executed. In the following step S2616, it is determined whether or not the flag is set after the end of the second CZ.

As described above, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section also ends. The first CZ mode is a CZ mode set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. However, when the flag is set after the end of the second CZ in step S2616, the advantageous section ends at the end of the second CZ mode. Further, it is shown that the AT mode transition lottery was not won even in the first CZ mode set at the time of the transition to the advantageous section thereafter. In other words, when the flag is not set after the end of the second CZ in step S2616, when the advantageous section ends at the end of the third CZ mode, or when the game is started from the normal section due to a setting change or the like, it is advantageous thereafter. It shows that the AT mode transition lottery was not won even in the first CZ mode set at the time of transition to the section.

As described above, when the flag is not set after the end of the second CZ, the CZ start effect and the first preparation start effect A are executed at the start of the first CZ mode (step S2306). Then, in step S2616, the flag is not set after the end of the second CZ, and the trigger for setting the CZ counter to be 0 this time is the first CZ mode, which is advantageous before the transition to the advantageous section set in the first CZ mode. If the end of the section is based on the end of the third CZ mode or is the first advantageous section transition after the setting change, the process of setting the precursor start flag is executed in step S2617. By such a process, in the continuous production started with the first CZ mode as an opportunity, the production after the second preparation production is started.

In the following step S2618, a process of setting a pseudo precursor flag is executed. If the precursor flag is set in step S2618, the process of clearing the precursor flag and then setting the pseudo precursor flag is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the flag is not set after the end of the second CZ and the continuous production is started triggered by the first CZ mode, regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery in the first CZ mode is successful or not. At the end of the first CZ mode, the continuous effect is set based on the pseudo precursor table. This is because in the setting process of the precursor mode in the first CZ mode on the main control device 101 side, the precursor mode is set so that the AT winning notification effect is performed 5 games after the CZ mode becomes 0. When the continuous production is started with the first CZ mode as an opportunity and the transition from the first preparation production to the second preparation production is performed, each AT winning notification command indicating the game in which the AT winning notification production should be executed is a game before the battle production. It is caused by being output in. That is, when the continuous production is started with the first CZ mode as a trigger, the continuous production may end without reaching the battle production. In this case, the continuous production until the end is shifted to the AT mode. Regardless of the result of the lottery, the effect mode uses the pseudo precursor effect table.

After that, in step S2619, the number of pseudo precursor games is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the number of games is set to be any one of 15 to 18 in step S2619. Then, in step S2620, the process of inputting the processing result of step S2619 to the continuous effect counter is executed, and in step S2621, the effect table corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter is determined from the pseudo precursor effect table by lottery or the like. .. Such a process is a process corresponding to the above step S2417. After that, in the same manner as in step S2418, in step S2622, the process of storing the address information of the determined pseudo precursor effect table in the address information storage area 183c is executed, and then the effect setting process for CZ termination is terminated. By executing such a process, it is possible to set the effect data based on the pseudo precursor effect table in steps S2213 and S2214 in the continuous effect setting process.

That is, regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery during the first CZ mode is successful or not, if the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode set without going through the second CZ mode, the first preparation set at the start of the first CZ mode. The effect shifts to the second preparatory effect upon the end of the first CZ mode, and the continuous effect based on the pseudo precursor effect table is executed. In this case, the continuous production will continue even after the end of the first CZ mode.

On the other hand, if the flag is set after the end of the second CZ in step S2616 and the advantageous section ends at the end of the second CZ mode, the process of clearing the second CZ end flag is executed in step S2623, and then the CZ end is performed. Ends the effect setting process of.

As described above, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the effects after the second preparation effect in the continuous effect are set to be executed based on the pseudo precursor effect table. (Step S2607 to step S2611). However, upon the subsequent transition to the first CZ mode, the continuous effect is reset for the first CZ mode. Such processing is performed in the CZ mode start setting process when the first CZ mode start command is received (FIG. 54).

That is, in the CZ mode start setting process, it is determined that the first CZ mode start command has been received and the first CZ mode flag has been set, and the flag has been set after the second CZ has ended in step S2305. If so, the process of grasping the value of the normal counter is executed in step S2307. As already explained, the normal counter is a counter for grasping the number of games started in the normal section, is added by 1 at the start of the game in the normal section, and is cleared at the end of the advantageous section after that. It is a counter. Then, in step S2308, a process for readjusting the number of games until the end of the continuous effect being executed this time is performed. More specifically, in step S2308, by subtracting the number of games started in the normal section grasped in step S2307 from the value obtained by adding the predetermined number (5) to the number of games in the first CZ mode to be started this time. , Calculate the number of games until the end of the continuous production currently being executed. As described above, the number of games in the first CZ mode is 8 to 10 games, and if the number of games started in the normal section is 1 game, the number of games calculated in step S2308 is There will be 12 to 14 games.

After that, in step S2309, the process of re-inputting the calculated value calculated in step S2308 into the continuous effect counter is executed, and then the CZ start setting process is terminated.

That is, in the first CZ mode, the advantageous section ends when the first end condition is satisfied, such as the advantageous section ends when the third CZ mode ends, or the advantageous section ends when the forced end condition such as setting change is satisfied. After the end, the advantageous section was set to the first CZ mode in the advantageous section that was subsequently transferred, and the advantageous section was terminated at the end of the second CZ mode. The effect content is different from the case where the first CZ mode is set in the advantageous section.

More specifically, in the case of the first CZ mode after the end of the advantageous section based on the former first end condition and at the time of transition to the advantageous section without going through the end of the second CZ mode, continuous production is performed at the start of the first CZ mode. The process for starting the above is performed, and the continuous effect is executed from the first preparatory effect. On the other hand, if it is the first CZ mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section through the end of the second CZ mode after the end of the advantageous section based on the establishment of the latter second end condition, it is set in the second CZ mode. As an effect that inherits the continuous effect, the effect after the second preparatory effect that has already started at the end of the second CZ mode is continuously executed.

In other words, if the advantageous section ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode as the second end condition described above, the result notification of the continuous effect started in the second CZ mode straddles the advantageous section. Will be executed in the next advantageous section. By doing so, in order to confirm the result of the continuous production, it is possible to suppress the end of the game at the end of the advantageous section and to support the continuation of the game.

In particular, as described above, when the continuous production is continued, the advantageous section after the side where the result notification is performed is configured to be played in the first CZ mode, so that the AT mode is used in the second CZ mode. Even if the transition lottery is not won and the second end condition is satisfied, the AT mode transition lottery is often won in the first CZ mode. Therefore, even if it is specified that the advantageous section has ended, that is, the second CZ mode has ended without being won in the AT mode transition lottery, the motivation is to confirm until the end of the continuous production. Is also possible.

Here, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode, the advantageous section does not end at the end of the second CZ mode, and the continuous effect being executed at the end of the second CZ mode becomes the second preparatory effect. The transition is made, and finally the winning production is achieved and the continuous production ends. When the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery as described above, and the configuration is such that the notification is performed in the advantageous section where the notification is re-shifted as a result, the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode is performed. Depending on the success or failure, not only the result notification of the final continuous production (winning production or defeating production), but also the number of games (game from the second preparation production to the battle production) as the content of the continuous production on the way to that. If the number) is different, it becomes possible to grasp the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode without waiting for the result notification of the final continuous production, and the result notification of the second CZ mode is re-shifted to the advantageous section. There is a possibility that the game will be terminated without confirming the result notification at the time when the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery is grasped.

As already explained, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the 2nd CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set so that the number of games after the 2nd CZ mode is 13 to 15 games, and the number of precursor games is set according to the number of precursor games. The production after the second preparatory production in the continuous production is executed. In the process of step S2308 described above, the number of remaining games in the continuous production when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery is continuous when the second CZ mode wins the AT mode transition lottery and ends. Processing to reflect the fluctuation of the number of games after the second CZ mode, which ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery, in the continuous production that has already started so that the number of games is the same as the number of remaining games in the production. I can say. More specifically, the fluctuation of the number of games after the second preparation effect that starts at the end of the second CZ mode is the number of games in the normal section and the number of games in the first CZ mode, and these games are the second CZ. The number of games is determined after the mode ends.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the number of games to be determined after the fact is set by setting a provisional number of games (15) and then starting the second preparatory production. In, the number of games until the end of the continuous production is readjusted. By doing this, the number of games from the start to the end of the second preparatory production can be changed in these normal sections and the first CZ mode while allowing the number of games in the normal section and the first CZ mode to change after the fact. It is possible to match the number of games from the start to the end of the second preparatory effect when is not sandwiched (when the AT mode transition lottery is won).

Then, when shifting to the first CZ mode via the end of the second CZ mode as described above, only the number of remaining games of the continuous effect being executed is readjusted, and the effect table of the continuous effect being executed is used as it is. It has a structure. In this way, by omitting the process for resetting the effect table, the process for resetting can be simplified, and the discomfort in the effect caused by resetting to a completely different effect table can be eliminated. can do.

When the AT mode transition lottery is won during the first CZ mode, the number of games obtained by adding 5 to the number of remaining games in the first CZ mode is set as the number of games until the notification of the AT mode transition winning. If the first CZ mode is in the first CZ mode via the end of the second CZ mode, the continuous effect after the second preparatory effect based on the pseudo precursor effect table is already executed at the end of the second CZ mode as described above. In the continuous effect setting process, the process switches to the continuous effect based on the precursor effect table (step S2217 to step S2219).

In this case, since the continuous effect of the number obtained by adding 5 to the number of remaining games in the first CZ mode is reset, the number of games started in the normal section in the above step S2308 is subtracted, so that the continuous effect is long. It will be switched to directing. Then, when the game shifts to the second preparatory effect at the end of the second CZ mode, and the number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect to the end of the continuous effect is longer than the predetermined number (15), the second CZ mode It will be confirmed that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the first CZ mode transitioned via.

On the other hand, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the first CZ mode that does not go through the second CZ mode, the immediate notification flag is set as before the precursor start flag is set (step S2206, step S2207).

When the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command from the main control device 101 side is received (step S2501: YES) in the effect setting process at the time of all stop, when the above-mentioned immediate notification flag is not set. In, the process for performing the AT winning notification effect is executed as described above (step S2503). That is, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode through the end of the second CZ mode, the AT winning notification effect is executed after the victory effect is performed in the final stage battle effect in the continuous effect being executed. To.

On the other hand, when the immediate notification flag is set in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2515, and the setting for performing the AT winning immediate notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is set. Execute. As described above, when the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command is received in the situation where the immediate notification flag is set, the twelfth preparation effect is still completed in the continuous effect. 2 It means the situation where the preparatory production is being executed. More specifically, after the first preparatory effect set at the start of the first AT mode is completed, five games later, and the second preparatory effect is being executed. Therefore, as the AT winning immediate notification effect, in response to the second preparatory effect, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), along with the fanning effect, a character or character such as "bonus confirmed !!" appears. do.

Here, in the start-time effect setting process, when the first AT winning immediate notification command or the second AT winning immediate notification command is received in step S2112, the effect content of the AT winning immediate notification effect set in step S2113 is described above. It is common with the production content of the production set in step S2503. Specifically, in step S2113, the effect content of the AT winning immediate notification effect is determined depending on whether or not the continuous effect is being executed. More specifically, in the current situation, if the first preparatory effect in the continuous effect is being executed, as an AT winning immediate notification effect, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), from the treasure box through the treasure box effect, " Execute a production in which characters and characters such as "Bonus confirmed !!" pop out. Further, in step S2113, if the second preparatory effect in the continuous effect is currently being executed, as the AT winning immediate notification effect, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the “bonus is confirmed” together with the fanning effect. !! ”and other characters and characters appear. Then, in step S2113, if the battle effect in the continuous effect is being executed, the victory effect (FIG. 64 (c1)) is executed in the game. Further, when the AT winning immediate notification effect is executed in a situation where the continuous effect is not executed, the same effect as that of the AT winning notification effect (FIG. 58 (a)) is executed. By doing so, if the AT winning immediate notification effect is performed after the end of the first CZ mode, did the immediate notification lottery win, or the AT mode transition lottery was won during the first CZ mode before that? It becomes difficult for the player to identify whether or not he was doing it.

<Relationship between various CZ modes and continuous production>
The flow of continuous production when various CZ modes are executed will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 68 to 74 and the outline table of FIG. 75.

68 and 69 are timing charts illustrating the flow of continuous production in the third CZ mode. As shown in FIG. 75, the third CZ mode is a CZ mode set after the end of the AT mode.

That is, for example, when the AT mode ends at the timing of t1, the third CZ mode is set at the timing of t1. When the third CZ mode is set, the continuous effect is started from the first preparatory effect. When shifting to the third CZ mode, the CZ effect counter is set, the first preparatory effect continues until the game at the timing of t2 when the CZ effect counter becomes 0, and the game switches to the second preparatory effect.

At the start of the second preparatory effect, the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is input to the continuous effect counter. Then, the effect table is set according to the value of the continuous effect counter. At the time of t2, since the AT mode transition lottery has not been won yet, when shifting to the second preparatory effect in t2, the effect table is set from the pseudo precursor effect table.

For example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won at the timing of t3 during the execution of the second preparation effect, the precursor command is output from the main control device 101. The precursor command includes information on the number of games (number of precursor production games) until the winning notification is given to the effect that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. In the case of the AT mode transition winning in the third CZ mode, the precursor command includes information on the number of games. The main control device 101 is set to perform the winning notification in the third CZ mode end game. That is, in the final game of continuous production using the pseudo precursor effect table that has already started on the display control device 81 side, it is set to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won.

As a result, when the precursor command is received at the timing of t3, only the switching process (step S2217 to step S2219) from the pseudo precursor effect table to the precursor effect table is performed, and the result notification game of the continuous effect is not changed. As a result, it is possible to change the content of the notification. In this case, in the second preparatory effect up to the timing of t4, the effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is performed at the timing of t2 to t3, and the effect using the precursor effect table is performed at the timing of t3 to t4. It will be.

After that, when the battle effect is started at the timing of t4 and the victory effect is executed at the timing of t5, the AT winning notification effect is also executed, and then the mode shifts to the AT mode. Incidentally, even after the AT mode winning flag is set at the timing of t3, the third CZ mode flag is set until the timing of t5.

As described above, the number of CZ production games corresponding to the number of games in which the first preparation production is performed in the continuous production in the third CZ mode is set so that the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is from 13 games to 15 games. To. Therefore, the number of games in the third CZ mode from t1 to t5 is 25 to 30 games, of which the number of games in the first preparation effect from t1 to t2 is 10 to 17 games, and from t2 to t5. The total number of games including the second continuous production and the battle production is 13 to 15 games.

Although the end timing of the battle effect and the AT mode transition timing may actually be different by several games, they are displayed as the same timing in the figure. This point is the same in the timing charts of FIGS. 68 to 74.

FIG. 69 shows a state in which the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the third CZ mode. That is, when the AT mode ends at the timing of t11 and is set to the third CZ mode, the first preparatory effect continues until the timing of t12 when the CZ effect counter becomes 0, as in FIG. 68. Then, when shifting to the second preparatory effect at the timing of t12, the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is input to the continuous effect counter.

The second continuous production ends at the timing of t13, and the battle production shifts to. Then, at the timing of t14, the defeat effect is executed in the battle effect. In the third CZ mode, the continuous effect is set to end at the end of the third CZ mode regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not. Therefore, the number of games in the third CZ mode from t11 to t14 is 25 to 30 games, of which t11 to t12, as in FIG. 68 showing the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won during the third CZ mode. The number of games of the first preparatory production up to is 10 to 17 games, and the total number of games of the second continuous production from t12 to t14 and the battle production is 13 to 15 games.

If the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery at t14, the advantageous section also ends. In this case, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is turned off.

After that, if the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won at the timing of t15, the section shifts to the advantageous section and the first CZ mode is set. Then, when the first CZ mode is set, the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is started. In this case, since the flag is not set after the end of the second CZ, the continuous effect started at the transition to the first CZ mode is started from the first preparatory effect. Then, the switching from the first preparatory effect to the second preparatory effect is performed at the timing of t16 when the first CZ mode ends.

70 and 71 are timing charts for explaining the continuous effect in the first CZ mode. As shown in FIG. 75, the first CZ mode is a CZ mode set at the time of transition to an advantageous section. That is, when the advantageous section ends via the third CZ mode at the timing of t21, the interval is re-shifted to the advantageous section at the timing of t22, and at that time, the first CZ mode is set. Then, as described above, the continuous production is started from the first preparatory production. When the AT mode transition lottery is won at the timing of t23 before the end of the first CZ mode, the main control device 101 side determines the number of games until the AT winning notification effect is performed, and the remaining games in the first CZ mode. It is set as the number of games obtained by adding 5 to the number.

On the display control device 81 side, when a precursor command based on winning the AT mode transition lottery is received at the timing of t23, the precursor flag is set and the immediate notification flag is set (step S2206, step). S2207). At the timing of t24 when the first CZ mode ends, the first preparatory effect is switched to the second preparatory effect, and the effect table corresponding to the randomly determined value of the continuous effect counter (13 to 15) is displayed from the pseudo precursor effect table. It is set (step S2617 to step S2622).

Then, the AT winning notification command is output from the main control device 101 5 games after the first CZ mode ends, that is, at the timing of t25 5 games after switching from the first preparation effect to the second preparation effect. .. Then, the display control device 81 side controls so that the AT winning immediate notification effect is performed in the second preparatory effect being executed (step S2502, step S2516). The AT winning immediate notification effect is an effect that is executed even when the immediate notification lottery is won, which is executed when the AT mode transition lottery is won. That is, without executing all the effects set at the start of the second preparation effect, the AT winning immediate notification effect notifies that the situation is such that the transition to the AT mode may occur.

On the other hand, FIG. 71 shows a case where the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the first CZ mode. That is, after the advantageous section ends at the timing of t31, the interval is re-shifted to the advantageous section at the timing of t32, and at that time, the first CZ mode is set. Then, as described above, the continuous effect is started from the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect is switched to at the timing of t33 when the first CZ mode ends. In this case, at the timing of t33, an effect table corresponding to a randomly determined value (13 to 15) of the continuous effect counter is set from the pseudo precursor effect table (steps S2617 to S2622). Then, at the timing of t34, the second preparatory production shifts to the battle production, and at the timing of t25, the defeat production is executed and the continuous production ends.

Here, when the first CZ mode ends, the advantageous section does not end and is maintained. Therefore, when the first CZ mode ends at the timing of t33, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, but the advantageous section continues, and the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display continues.

In the advantageous section as the normal mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed and the CZ mode transition lottery is also performed. As shown in FIG. 75, when the CZ mode transition lottery in the advantageous section is won, the second CZ mode is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section game number AG is less than 31 as the first predetermined value, it is set not to win the CZ mode transition lottery (step S812), and the first CZ. The event set to the second CZ mode does not occur during the execution of the continuous effect for the mode. Further, even when the number of games AG in the advantageous section exceeds 700 as the second predetermined value, it is set not to win the CZ mode transition lottery (step S812), and the ceiling counter is just before becoming 0. Nevertheless, it is suppressed that the second CZ mode is set, that is, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the advantageous section ends and the ceiling is reset.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the CZ mode transition lottery is won at the timing of t41, which is an advantageous section as a normal mode and the number of games AG in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value and equal to or less than the second predetermined value, the first 2 Set to CZ mode. When the second CZ mode is set, the continuous effect is started from the first preparatory effect. Then, when the AT mode transition is won during the second CZ mode, the number of games is obtained by adding the number of remaining games in the second CZ mode to the lottery result after the lottery process (13 games to 15 games) for the number of precursor games is performed. Is set as the number of precursor games. For example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won at the timing of t42 during the second CZ mode and the first preparation effect is being executed, and the precursor command is output from the main control device 101, the precursor command included in the precursor command is included. The number of games is input to the continuous production counter. In this case, at the timing of t42 when the precursor command is received, only the input processing to the continuous effect counter is executed, and the switching from the first preparatory effect to the second preparatory effect is not performed. Then, even if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the second CZ mode, the first preparatory effect continues until the timing of t43 when the second CZ mode ends.

When the second CZ mode ends at the timing of t43, a process of setting an effect table corresponding to the value (13 to 15) of the continuous effect counter at that time from the precursor effect table is performed. As a result, after switching to the battle effect at the timing of t44, the victory effect is executed in the game of t45 where the continuous effect counter becomes 0, the AT winning notification effect is performed, and the transition to the AT mode occurs. become. That is, the number of games from the start of the second preparatory production of t43 to the end of the continuous production is 13 to 15 games.

FIG. 73 shows a case where the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. Similar to the case of FIG. 72, when the CZ mode transition lottery is won at the timing of t51, which is an advantageous section as the normal mode, the second CZ mode is set. When the second CZ mode is set, the continuous effect is started from the first preparatory effect. When the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery at the timing of t52, the second preparatory effect is switched to the second preparatory effect, but the second preparatory effect is an effect using the pseudo precursor effect table. Incidentally, at the end of the second CZ mode, 15 is input as a predetermined number to the continuous effect counter, and an effect table corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter is set from the pseudo precursor effect table.

Further, the advantageous section also ends at the timing of t52 when the second CZ mode ends. However, as described above, at the end of the second CZ mode, the second preparatory effect is set, and the continuous effect itself will continue. Further, at the end of the second CZ mode, the flag is set after the end of the second CZ.

When re-shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t53, the first CZ mode is set. In this case, since the flag is set after the end of the second CZ as described above, the setting process for starting the continuous effect is not executed at the transition to the first CZ mode, and the setting process for resetting the continuous effect being executed is not executed. Is done. More specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the number of games (t52 to t53) in the normal section from the value obtained by adding 5 to the number of games in the first CZ mode this time is re-entered into the continuous production counter, and then the re-input is continuous. The effect table corresponding to the value of the effect counter is reset from the pseudo precursor effect table (step S2307 to step S2309). Then, at the timing when the first CZ mode ends at the timing of t54, the second preparation effect is switched to the battle effect, and the continuous effect ends at the timing of t55, which is five games later. FIG. 72 shows that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the first CZ mode, and in this case, the defeat effect is executed at the timing of t55. In this case, in the continuous production started with the second CZ mode as an opportunity, the number of games from the start of the second preparatory production of t52 to the end of the continuous production is t55, and the number of games is 13 to 15 games. It is the same as the number of games when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the 2CZ mode.

Further, as described above, regarding the first CZ mode, even if the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section does not end. Therefore, after the defeat effect is performed at the timing of t55, the situation is that the section is advantageous and the normal mode is used. As described above, if the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is won in such a situation, the mode shifts to the second CZ mode.

Even in the first CZ mode in which the continuous effect being executed is inherited, the AT mode transition lottery may be won, and FIG. 74 shows such a scene. That is, when the second CZ mode is started at the timing of t61 and the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section also ends at the timing of t62. In this case, the point at which the first preparatory effect is switched to the second preparatory effect at the timing of t62, and the second preparatory effect is a pseudo according to the value of the continuous effect counter in which a predetermined predetermined number (15) is input. As already explained, the production is based on the precursor production table. When the transition to the advantageous section is performed again at the timing of t63, the first CZ mode is set, and the continuous production during execution is also reset for the first CZ mode (from the value obtained by adding 5 to the number of games in the first CZ mode). The value obtained by subtracting the number of games in the normal section is input to the continuous production counter).

If the AT mode transition lottery is won at the timing of t64 in the first CZ mode, the number of games from the winning game to the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is the number of games remaining in the first CZ mode plus 5. It is set as the number of games (step S1111, step S1112). Then, after the first CZ mode ends at the timing of t65 and the second preparation effect is switched to the battle effect, the victory effect is executed at the timing of t66 five games later, and the AT winning notification effect is performed. ..

Then, in the continuous production started with the second CZ mode as an opportunity, the number of games from the start of the second preparatory production of t62 to t66 when the continuous production ends is a normal section (more than 13 games to 15 games). It will be longer by the amount of t62 to t63). That is, if 16 games or more continue from the start of the second continuous production to the end of the battle production, it is confirmed that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the first CZ mode set at the time of re-transition to the advantageous section. More specifically, when the second preparatory effect continues for 11 games or more, the AT mode transition winning in the first CZ mode is confirmed.

In addition, for example, when the first CZ mode is set as eight games and the normal section ends in one game, and the AT mode transition is won during the first CZ mode, the second preparation effect is started. The number of games from to the end of the continuous production is 14 games in total, including 1 game in the normal section, 8 games in the first CZ mode, and 5 games that are always added. Then, for example, when the first CZ mode is set as nine games and the normal section ends in one game, and the AT mode transition is not won during the first CZ mode, the second preparation effect is started. It is the same game as 14 games, which is the number of games (1 game + 9 games + 5 games-1 game) from to the end of the continuous production, and the determination cannot be made from the number of games.

The case where the number of games from the start of the second preparation effect to the end of the continuous effect is 16 games or more is, for example, when the first CZ mode is set as 10 games and the normal section continues for 1 game or more, or the first When the 1CZ mode is set as 9 games and the normal section continues for 2 games or more, or when the 1st CZ mode is set as 8 games and the normal section continues for 3 games or more.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed for all the results other than the deviation in the game executed in the normal game, and the advantageous section transition lottery is won with a 100% probability. .. In a game executed in a normal game, the probability of deviation is about 1 in 5.03, so in the normal section, there is a probability of about 1/94.97 in the normal section to shift to the advantageous section. Become. The number of continuous games in the first CZ mode is configured so that 8 games and 9 games are easier to select than 10 games, and 10 games are set with a probability of about 20% (FIG. 36). That is, in the continuous production via the second CZ mode, it is possible to determine that the period from the start of the second preparation production to the end of the battle production is 16 games or more, and the AT mode transition is won in the re-shifted advantageous section. Even if the AT mode transition is won in the advantageous section of the re-transition, the time from the start of the second preparatory production to the end of the battle production is less than 16 games, and the re-transition Various settings have been made so that it is more likely to occur when it cannot be determined that the AT mode transition has been won in the advantageous section.

Here, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the first CZ mode, on the main control device 101 side, the first CZ mode goes through the second CZ mode after the advantageous section ends due to the satisfaction of the first end condition. It is not known whether it is the first CZ mode that does not exist, or the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode after the advantageous section ends due to the satisfaction of the second end condition. That is, it is not known whether the continuous effect executed in the first CZ mode is in the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect. On the other hand, if the main control device 101 is configured to determine which effect is to be performed, the processing load on the main control device 101 side will increase, and the main control device 101, which is responsible for the progress of the game such as lottery, and the effect By providing the display control device 81 of the above, the effect of decentralizing the processing load is eliminated. Further, if the game in which the AT winning notification effect is executed is determined on the display control device 81 side, the game for starting the AT mode on the main control device 101 side and the AT winning notification effect on the display control device 81 side are performed. Inconsistencies may occur, such as a large game difference from the game, or an AT winning notification effect being performed after the AT mode is started.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game in which the AT winning notification effect is performed is determined on the main control device 101 side, and if the AT mode transition winning in the first CZ mode is won, the AT winning notification effect is performed. The game is set to be after the number of games remaining in the first AT mode plus the five games in which the battle effect is performed. By doing so, if the display control device 81 side is executing the first preparation effect, the AT winning immediate notification effect is executed after waiting for the output of the AT winning notification command from the main control device 101 side. Moreover, if the second preparation effect is being executed, the AT winning notification effect can be executed by simply changing the content of the battle effect without changing the game of the result notification of the battle effect. It becomes possible, and then it becomes possible not to cause a sense of discomfort or inconvenience in the configuration in which the AT mode is started.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the AT mode transition lottery is won in the 1st CZ mode, the 2nd CZ mode, or the 3rd CZ mode, or if the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the 1st CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is supported. The second preparatory effect and the battle effect of the continuous effect are executed in the advantageous section in which the AT mode transition lottery is executed. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is executed for the second preparatory production and the battle production of the continuous production corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery. After the advantageous section is completed, it can be executed in the advantageous section that has been transferred again. That is, the continuous effect corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery may be executed without straddling the advantageous section or may be executed across the advantageous section. By doing so, it is considered that the player who wants to know the result of the AT mode transition lottery will continue the game to confirm the continuous production even if the advantageous section ends once, and the advantageous section ends. Is less likely to trigger the end of the game. Moreover, even if the game is ended at the end of the advantageous section, if the second CZ mode is before the end of the advantageous section, it is before the notification of the result of the continuous effect, and the continuous effect should be confirmed. It is considered that it will be easier for the successor player to start the game. In other words, in any case, it is expected that the operating rate of the gaming machine will be improved. Then, by using the configuration in which the player wants to continue the game in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, when performing continuous production across advantageous sections, the display control device 81 side is configured to execute the set continuous production without determining whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and in the normal section. Even if there is, it is a configuration that executes continuous production. By doing this, even though the continuous production that straddles the advantageous section was set, it is clear that the continuous production was interrupted when the transition to the normal section was made, and the transition to the normal section was made. It is possible to avoid the event that becomes.

It is executed in the advantageous section where the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the continuous production was performed, and in the advantageous section after the advantageous section where the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the continuous production was performed. In any of the continuous productions, the battle production is performed through the second preparatory production, and the production mode is common.

More specifically, for example, it is set when the second preparation effect or battle effect is set when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the first CZ mode, and when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode. Since the effect table is selected from the same pseudo-precursor effect table in both the second preparation effect and the battle effect, the effect modes of the second preparation effect and the battle effect are common. Further, for example, the second preparation effect and the battle effect set when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode, and the second preparation set when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode. In the production and battle production, the former is configured to select the production table from the precursor production table, while the latter is configured to select the production table from the pseudo precursor production table, but the precursor production table and the pseudo precursor production table. In particular, each production table is set so that the content of the second preparation production and the production content before the result production (victory production, defeat production) in the battle production are common.

That is, it is difficult for the player to determine from the contents of the second preparation effect and the battle effect whether the continuous effect that does not straddle the advantageous section or the continuous effect that straddles the advantageous section is performed. It has become. In particular, the case where the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the first CZ mode and the case where the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode are common to the result production in the battle production, and the production content thereof. It is not possible to determine whether or not the advantageous section has ended from. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the advantageous section has ended, and it is possible to suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of the advantageous section.

Setting of the precursor effect table used to set the effect mode of the continuous effect when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode, and the effect mode of the continuous effect when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode. With the pseudo omen effect table used for the above, an effect table is set in which the effect mode from the second preparatory effect to before the result notification effect in the battle effect is the same. More specifically, for example, as the effect table selected when the continuous effect counter is 15, the precursor effect table ZA0301 and the pseudo precursor effect table ZB0301 are each game of the second preparation effect in which the continuous effect counter is 15 to 6. The type of fanning effect executed in is common, and the battle content executed in each game before the result notification effect in the battle effect in which the continuous effect counter is 5 to 2 is also common. That is, there are cases where the precursor effect table ZA0301 is selected and the continuous effect is executed, and cases where the pseudo precursor effect table ZB0301 is selected and the continuous effect is executed, at least before the result notification effect is executed. It is not possible to grasp the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery from the production mode of the continuous production. By doing so, when the continuous production is executed triggered by the second CZ mode, it is difficult for the player to detect that the AT mode transition lottery is not won and the advantageous section ends once. be able to.

Furthermore, in the case of being executed in the advantageous section where the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the continuous production was performed, and in the advantageous section after the advantageous section in which the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the continuous production was performed. In any of the continuous productions, the number of games from the transition to the second preparatory production to the end of the continuous production is common.

More specifically, the number of games from the transition to the second preparatory effect to the end of the continuous effect is a value input to the continuous effect counter when the precursor start flag is set and the transition to the second preparatory effect is performed. As defined by the value already input, for example, the value of the continuous production counter when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the first CZ mode is determined in the pseudo precursor game number lottery process (step S2619). 13 to 15. On the other hand, the value of the continuous effect counter when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode is 15 (step S2608).

If the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode, 15 is uniformly input at the transition of the second continuous production. Then, after the advantageous section ends based on the end of the second CZ mode, when the first CZ mode is set in the re-shifted advantageous section, the main controller 101 side draws a lottery for the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode ( 8-10). On the display control device 81 side, the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode determined on the main control device 101 side and the number of games in the normal section are used to temporarily set the continuous games at the end of the second CZ mode. The number of games until the end of the production is readjusted (step S2307 to step S2309). By this readjustment, the number of games from the transition of the second continuous effect to the end of the continuous effect when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode is set to be 13 to 15. That is, when the result of the AT mode transition lottery is the same (off), the number of games from the second preparatory effect in the continuous effect to the end of the continuous effect may or may not straddle the advantageous section. It is common.

Further, for example, the value of the continuous effect counter when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode is 13 to 15 corresponding to the number of precursor games determined on the main control device 101 side. On the other hand, the value of the continuous effect counter when the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode is 15 as described above, and is set to 13 to 15 by the subsequent readjustment. That is, even if the results of the AT mode transition lottery are different, the number of games from the second preparatory effect in the continuous effect to the end of the continuous effect may or may not straddle the advantageous section. It is common. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the advantageous section has ended due to the difference in the number of games of continuous production, and it is possible to suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of the advantageous section. ..

In the second CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the second preparatory effect is started with the end game of the second CZ mode as an opportunity. Further, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the final game in the second CZ mode, the second preparatory production is started with the final game (end game) in the second CZ mode as an opportunity. In this case, the number of games from the start of the second preparation effect to the result notification effect of the battle effect is 13 to 15 games as described above, and the continuous effect is executed over the advantageous section. It is common regardless of whether or not it is. That is, in the above case, the number of games from the second preparation effect to the result notification effect of the battle effect after the AT mode transition lottery that triggers the continuous effect after the second preparation effect is executed is the end of the advantageous section. It can be said that it is common regardless of the presence or absence of. By doing so, for example, regardless of the number of games from the game that was the game result (for example, a specific role such as cherry A to C) that is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery to the end of the continuous production. The result of the AT mode transition lottery becomes difficult to predict, and the effect of enjoying continuous production to the end is enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the end of the game once the advantageous section ends during the continuous production.

In this case, even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the 2nd CZ mode, the end game of the 2nd CZ mode is still an advantageous section, so that the continuous production after the winning 2nd preparation production is in the 2nd CZ mode. Will be started in. That is, even if the advantageous section ends once, if the advantageous section ends once in the configuration in which the number of games after the second preparation effect in the continuous effect is common to the case where the advantage section does not end once, the second preparation effect is performed. , It is configured to start before the end of the advantageous section.

Here, in order to share the number of games after the second preparation effect with the case where the advantageous section does not end once, for example, it is better to configure the configuration in which the second preparation effect is started when the advantage section is re-shifted. Since the state in which the number of staying games such as the normal section can change is not included in the number of games in the continuous production and the number of games in the first CZ mode is also determined, it is easy to adjust the number of games in the continuous production and the control is simple. It is preferable in that respect.

On the other hand, during the first preparatory production prior to the second preparatory production, the AT mode transition lottery is executed according to the lottery result of each game using the CZ mode transition lottery table, and the player. Is considered to be relatively easy to pay attention to the lottery result of the game (stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) rather than the production content. Then, during the second preparatory production, the player functions as a zone for predicting the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode according to the mode of occurrence of the productions A to C, and the player is relatively able to play the game. It is considered that it is easier to pay attention to the content of the production than the result of the lottery. That is, it is considered that it is more likely that the player's interest is directed toward the content of the second preparation during the period when the second preparation is performed rather than the first preparation in the continuous production.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the second preparatory effect is started before the end of the advantageous section, and by doing so, the effect of camouflaging the end of the advantageous section by the second preparatory effect is more preferably expected. It is thought that it can be done.

As described above, there are cases where the AT mode transition lottery is won during the second CZ mode and cases where the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the second CZ mode. The number of games until the end of is common (13 to 15 games). That is, even if the results of the AT mode transition lottery are different and the presence or absence of the end of the advantageous section is different, the number of games from the second preparation effect to the end of the continuous effect is standardized. By doing so, it becomes difficult not only to specify whether or not the advantageous section ends from the number of games, but also to specify the type of game result from the number of games.

Further, if the first CZ mode that does not go through the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section does not end. In this case, at the end of the first CZ mode, the number of games from the start of the second preparation effect to the end of the continuous effect is the second preparation when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. It is the same as the number of games from the production to the end (13 to 15 games). That is, even if the result of the AT mode transition lottery is the same and the presence or absence of the end of the advantageous section is different, the number of games from the second preparation effect to the end of the continuous effect is standardized. By doing so, it becomes difficult not only to specify whether or not the advantageous section ends from the number of games, but also to specify the type of game result from the number of games.

For example, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the second CZ mode, or if the AT mode transition lottery is won in a situation where continuous production is being executed based on the pseudo continuous production table, the precursor effect table is displayed on the way. It switches to the continuous production based on (step S2217 to step S2219). By doing so, the continuous production can be enjoyed to the end.

In particular, in the situation where the continuous effect is executed based on the pseudo continuous effect table when the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the second CZ mode, the first CZ mode is set in the re-shifted advantageous section. There is a high probability that the AT mode transition lottery can be won with a higher probability than in the normal mode. With such a configuration, even if it is felt in the middle that the continuous production being executed is triggered by the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the continuous production is performed. Assuming that the situation itself is a situation in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, it is possible to keep the interest in the game or the game production.

In a situation where the first CZ mode can be entered while the continuous effect based on the pseudo continuous effect table is being executed, that is, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the number of games up to the end game of the continuous effect. Is configured to match the number of games until the number of precursor games becomes 0 when the AT mode transition is won in the first CZ mode. More specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the first CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set as the number of games obtained by adding a predetermined number (5) to the number of remaining games in the first CZ mode. 2 The number of games remaining in the continuous effect set at the end of the CZ mode is readjusted by using the number of games obtained by adding a predetermined number (5) to the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode at the time of transition to the first CZ mode. did. By doing so, when the AT mode transition is won during the first CZ mode, the number of games up to the end of the continuous production that has already been executed is added to the number of precursor games set on the main control device 101 side. It becomes a match, and it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the continuous production during execution becomes unnaturally long or short.

In this case, at the time of re-transition to the advantageous section, the value obtained by subtracting the number of games executed in the normal section (normal counter) from the number obtained by adding the predetermined number (5) to the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode is continuously used. Since it is configured to be re-input to the production counter, the number of games of continuous production that has already started is readjusted according to the number of games that can change after the fact, such as the number of games in the normal section and the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode. In addition, it is possible to absorb the change due to the number of games in the normal section into the number of games of continuous production that have already started. That is, by subtracting the number of games in the normal section as in the above configuration, the change from the number of games of the continuous production that has already started is only the change due to the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode, and the continuous production is more continuous. It is possible to reduce the ex post facto change in the number of games.

Then, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, the number of remaining games of the continuous production already executed may or may not change, and the case where it does not change is the case. I try to increase the ratio. That is, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the first CZ mode, the case where the winning can be detected by the change in the number of remaining games of the continuous production mainly continues at the transition of the first CZ mode. When the number of games is set as 10 games, and when it is set as 8 games or 9 games other than that, basically, the winning cannot be detected from the change in the number of games. By doing so, basically, the structure is such that the continuous production can be enjoyed with a stance that the AT mode transition winning cannot be detected during the execution of the continuous production, and the effect of enjoying the continuous production to the end can be enhanced. can. And, due to the rarity of being able to detect the AT mode transition winning from the change in the number of games, it is possible to make a great joy to be able to detect the winning, and it is possible to make the playability interesting. ..

The AT mode transition lottery and the AT winning notification effect are configured to match the number of games with continuous production as described above with the number of games from winning the AT mode transition lottery to the game for which the AT winning notification effect should be performed. The game to be played is determined on the main control device 101 side, and the number of games for continuous production is determined on the display control device 81 side. By doing so, the final game of continuous production is performed while not eliminating the effect of decentralization of processing by the main control device 101 that performs processing related to the interests of the player and the display control device 81 for production. And the game that performs the AT winning notification effect can be matched.

If the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section does not end, but if the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section ends. After the configuration, the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the first CZ mode and the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode are executed after the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode are completed. It was configured. By doing so, if the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode is to be confirmed regardless of the end of the advantageous section, it is necessary to continue the game until the result notification after the end of the CZ mode. It becomes possible to cause it, and it is possible to suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of the advantageous section.

Then, as described above, both the case of performing the continuous production corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery of the first CZ mode and the case of performing the continuous production corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery of the second CZ mode are precursors. The effect table is selected from the effect table and the pseudo precursor effect table to set the effect content, and the common effect table can be selected in the continuous effect triggered by both CZ modes. By doing so, it becomes difficult to determine which CZ mode is the trigger for the continuous production from the production content, and as a result, it is possible to successfully camouflage that the advantageous section can be ended when the second CZ mode ends. Is possible.

The number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect to the end of the continuous effect can be the same for both the continuous effect that starts with the first CZ mode and the continuous effect that starts with the second CZ mode. I set it. That is, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the first CZ mode, the number of games until the end of the continuous production is set through the pseudo precursor game number lottery (step S2619), and more specifically, 13 to 15 games. Is set. If the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode, the number of games until the end of the temporary continuous production is set, and the number of games until the end of the continuous production is reset when the transition to the advantageous section is performed again. After that, it is set to be 13 to 15 games. By doing so, it becomes difficult to determine which CZ mode is the trigger for the continuous effect based on the number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect to the end of the continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of concealing that the advantageous section may end in the middle.

On the other hand, the first CZ mode continues for 8 to 10 games, the second CZ mode continues for 13 to 15 games, and the number of continuous games in both CZ modes is different. By doing so, it is possible to set the high and low of the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery using the number of continuous games in the CZ mode, and it is possible to contribute to the diversification of the game. Even in this case, since the result of the AT mode transition lottery in both CZ modes is notified after the end of both CZ modes, it affects the commonality of the continuous production triggered by both CZ modes. It is possible to diversify the game without having to.

Even if it is the first CZ mode, if it is the first CZ mode that shifts via the second CZ mode, the game of the first CZ mode is executed during the execution of the continuous effect triggered by the second CZ mode. The result of the AT mode transition lottery of the first CZ mode of the continuous effect triggered by the second CZ mode is notified by the continuous effect triggered by the second CZ mode. That is, although the configuration is such that the continuous production can be performed with the first CZ mode as a trigger, if the first CZ mode is in the continuous production triggered by the second CZ mode, the continuous production is not performed with the first CZ mode as a trigger. , It is configured to use the continuous production that has already been executed. By doing so, the player does not eliminate the effect of performing the result notification after each CZ mode, but when the result notification on the front side and the CZ mode on the rear side overlap. You can enjoy the production without any discomfort.

After the transition to the advantageous section, the configuration does not shift to the second CZ mode over the maximum number of continuous games of continuous production. By doing so, the first CZ mode can be duplicated during the result notification for the second CZ mode as described above, but the second CZ mode cannot be duplicated during the result notification for the first CZ mode. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second CZ mode, in which the transition timing is easily changed, from overlapping with the result notification of the first CZ mode, and it is possible to simplify the process.

As described above, the continuous effect can include a plurality of CZ modes such as the second CZ mode and the first CZ mode, and the continuous effect can include a game started in a normal section. By doing so, an advantageous section in which the transition to the AT mode can occur and a normal section in which the transition to the AT mode cannot occur are provided, and further, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section becomes high or low. While expecting the effect of inflection of the game by setting multiple states with different expectations for AT mode, such as providing a mode and CZ mode, the expectation for AT mode is low. , It is necessary to confuse the continuous production corresponding to the state where the expectation for the AT mode is high, and preferably avoid the phenomenon that the attention of the game is lowered when the expectation for the AT mode is low. Is possible.

The game started in the normal section is sandwiched between a plurality of CZ modes so that the continuous production is performed. By doing so, even if it is detected that the transition to the normal section is performed during the continuous production, the degree of attention to the game is reduced by utilizing the expectation for the CZ mode that shifts after that. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In the continuous production, the second CZ mode exists on the front side and the first CZ mode exists on the rear side so as to sandwich the game started in the normal section, and the second CZ mode shifts to the AT mode rather than the first CZ mode. The structure is such that the expectation of winning the lottery is high. In this way, if the second CZ mode on the side closer to the start timing of the continuous production is configured to win the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous production is triggered by the fact that the continuous production is not won in the AT mode transition lottery. It becomes difficult to give the impression of directing, and it is possible to raise expectations for continuous directing.

In the configuration in which a plurality of CZ modes and a normal section are included in the continuous effect, the normal mode in the advantageous section does not intervene between the CZ mode and the normal section. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the period in which the attention level is low from becoming long due to the continuation of the normal mode in which the expectation of winning the AT mode transition lottery is low and the normal mode in the advantageous section. can.

In a configuration in which a plurality of CZ modes and a normal section are included in the continuous effect, a normal mode in an advantageous section can exist after the CZ mode, and this normal mode is also included in the continuous effect. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in attention in the normal mode by using continuous production, and moreover, the normal mode exists on the rear side of the CZ mode instead of the front side. Therefore, even if the normal mode is included, it is difficult to give the impression that the continuous production is a continuous production triggered by the fact that the continuous production is not won in the AT mode transition lottery, and the expectation for the continuous production is increased. Can be done.

In the continuous production including a plurality of CZ modes and normal sections as described above, the ratio occupied by the CZ mode is set to be larger than the ratio occupied by the normal section, so that the expectation of the continuous production can be expected. It can be suitably secured.

When the continuous effect is executed, for example, there is a pattern in which the normal section is not included in the continuous effect, such as the third CZ mode. Therefore, as described above, the plurality of CZ modes and the normal section are continuously produced. Even if the pattern is included in, there is an effect that it is expected that the normal section is not included.

In this case, since the number of games and the content of the continuous production are standardized between the pattern including the normal section and the pattern not including the normal section, the pattern including the above normal section does not include the normal section. Then, the effect that makes you expect is enhanced.

Regardless of the degree of advantage in the advantageous section to be transferred, the content of the effect at the time of transition to the advantageous section was different depending on whether or not the end of the previous advantageous section was triggered by the second CZ mode. More specifically, the configuration is set to the first CZ mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the effect content is different depending on the presence or absence of the flag after the end of the second CZ regardless of the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode. By doing so, not only the event in the advantageous section but also the end information of the previous advantageous section is included as a parameter for determining the effect content in the advantageous section, and the degree of advantage in the advantageous section is complicated. It is possible to diversify the contents of the production in the advantageous section without causing the change.

In this case, the main control device 101 manages the process of ending or shifting the advantageous section, while the display control device 81 manages the flag after the end of the second CZ as the end information of the previous advantageous section. It was configured. By doing so, it is possible to initialize the information for the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section and to associate each advantageous section in terms of production while ensuring the significance of making each advantageous section independent. Will be.

When the flag is set after the end of the second CZ at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the effect setting process (step S2603 to step S2611) at the end of the second CZ mode is executed at the end of the previous advantageous section, and the pseudo-continuous The continuous production after the second preparation production based on the production table has already started. In this case, in the effect setting process (step S2304 to step S2309) at the start of the first CZ mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the effect in the continuous effect being executed is provided on the condition that the flag is set after the end of the second CZ. The table is taken over as it is, and only the continuous production counter is re-input. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect that associates the previous advantageous section with the current advantageous section, and it is possible to divert the effect data at the time of setting, so that the effect data for association can be used. The data storage capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the data is stored in advance.

On the other hand, the case where the flag is not set after the end of the second CZ at the time of shifting to the advantageous section is the case where the previous advantageous section ends with the end of the third CZ mode as a trigger. In this case, the continuous effect is completed at the end of the third CZ mode, and the continuous effect is newly set without taking over the content of the previous continuous effect at the transition to the advantageous section. That is, when the flag is set after the end of the second CZ, the second CZ is used as the effect data to be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, assuming a configuration in which the effect data of the continuous effect can be diverted as it is. Only the effect data for setting when the flag is not set after the end needs to be stored in advance. By doing so, in order to diversify the effect mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the amount of effect data to be stored in advance, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

Here, the presence / absence of the flag after the end of the second CZ indicates whether or not the end of the previous advantageous section is triggered by the end of the second CZ mode, and the flag after the end of the second CZ is set. When there is no case, as described above, it basically means that the end of the previous advantageous section is triggered by the end of the third CZ mode. That is, as described above, the configuration in which the effect mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section is set depending on the presence or absence of the flag after the end of the second CZ is re-shifted to the advantageous section depending on the type of CZ mode that triggered the end of the previous advantageous section. It can be said that it is a configuration that sets the production mode when performing. By doing so, the regret and unsatisfaction of the player who did not win the AT mode transition in the CZ mode where the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery was increased will be followed by the production at the time of the next advantageous section transition. It becomes possible to do.

More specifically, the second CZ mode is set to continue for 13 to 15 games, while the third CZ mode is set to continue for 25 to 30 games. Then, since the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode is smaller than that in the third CZ mode, the player is not satisfied with the number of executions of the AT mode transition lottery when the advantageous section ends with the second CZ mode as an opportunity. It is thought that you can feel. In that respect, as in the above configuration, when the advantageous section ends with the second CZ mode as an opportunity, if the continuous production in the second CZ mode is taken over in the advantageous section to be re-shifted, it is as if the second CZ. It is possible to make it seem as if the mode is still continuing, and it is possible to follow the player's unsatisfaction in terms of production.

In addition, since the number of continuous games is larger in the 3rd CZ mode than in the 2nd CZ mode, it is more likely that the 3rd CZ mode will win the AT mode transition lottery than the 2nd CZ mode, and the AT mode transition lottery will be won. It is considered that the player's regret when the CZ mode is terminated without fail is greater in the third CZ mode than in the second CZ mode. In that respect, as in the above configuration, when the advantageous section ends with the third CZ mode as an opportunity, the continuous production is started again without taking over the continuous production of the previous advantageous section in the advantageous section to be reset again. With the configuration, the player's feelings can be reset once, and the AT mode transition winning can be challenged with a new feeling.

In this way, by associating the advantageous section with the effect while making good use of the player's psychology, the effect of attracting the player can be expected, and the effect of immersing himself in the game can be further enhanced. Will be.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the end lottery of the advantageous section is executed, and when the end lottery is won, the advantageous section ends. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the second section display process in the present embodiment. As described above, the second section display process is a process executed at the end of the game in the reel control process on the main control device 101 side.

In the present embodiment, similarly to the above steps S1901 to S1909, in steps S2701 to S2709, the update process of the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (step S2702, step S2703), the upper limit game number and the upper limit A process for predicting the arrival of an increased number of sheets (step S2704, step S2705), a process for ending an advantageous section (step S2707 to step S2709), and the like are executed. When it is determined in step S2706 that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number has not been reached, it is determined in step S2710 whether or not the CZ end game flag is set. When the CZ end game flag is set, it is determined in step S2711 whether or not the third CZ mode flag is set. When the third CZ mode flag is set and the game is the end game of the third CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S2707, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed, and then the second process of displaying this section is ended.

If the third CZ mode flag is not set in step S2711, the process proceeds to step S2712 to determine whether or not the second CZ mode flag is set. If the second CZ mode flag is not set and the game is the end game of the first CZ mode, the first CZ mode flag is cleared in step S2713, and then the section display second process is terminated. That is, it is the same as the first embodiment in that the advantageous section continues without ending even if the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

If the second CZ mode flag is set in step S2712 and the game is the end of the second CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S2714. In step S2714, the advantageous section end lottery process is executed. In such a process, the advantageous section end lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and it is determined by lottery whether or not to end the advantageous section at the end of the second CZ mode.

As shown in FIG. 76B, for example, the advantageous section end lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the advantageous section end lottery differs depending on the value of the ceiling counter. More specifically, the smaller the value of the current ceiling counter, the more difficult it is to win the lottery for the end of the advantageous section. It is set to win at 20%, win at 40% for 301-500, and win at 50% for 501-999. By doing so, the ceiling counter will soon become 0, and even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the AT mode winning flag will be set, but it is advantageous at the end of the second CZ mode. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of an event in which the number of ceiling games is reset when the section ends.

The winning probability of the advantageous section end lottery is not limited to the above, and it may be arbitrary as the value of the ceiling counter is larger, and it may be easier to win, and the advantageous section game number AG is used instead of the ceiling counter. It may be configured to hold a lottery. Further, the winning probability may be different depending on the set value. For example, the higher the setting (the higher the setting value is, the more difficult it is to win the advantageous section end lottery), or the even number setting. While it is easy to win the lottery at the end of the advantageous section, it may be difficult to win with an odd number setting. Further, the winning probability of the advantageous section end lottery may be different depending on the lottery result of the game that triggers the advantageous section end lottery, for example, as compared with the case where the lottery result of this game is cherry B. In the case of Cherry A, it may be difficult to win the lottery for the end of the advantageous section. The lottery result of the game that triggers the advantageous section end lottery is not limited to the lottery result of only the end game of the second CZ mode, and the lottery result of each game in the second CZ mode is the advantageous section end lottery. In this case, the advantage section end lottery may be executed by using the points acquired in each game, such as the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode.

After executing the advantageous section end lottery in step S2714, it is determined in step S2715 whether or not the advantageous section end lottery has been won. If the lottery for ending the advantageous section is won, the process proceeds to step S2707, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed, and then the second process for displaying the advantageous section is ended. On the other hand, if the lottery for ending the advantageous section is not won, the process of clearing the second CZ mode flag is executed in step S2716, and the end avoidance command is output to the display control device 81 in step S2717. After setting, the second process of displaying this section ends. In this case, the advantageous section does not end at the end of the second CZ mode, and the advantageous section continues as the normal mode. In addition, the end avoidance command includes information on the value of the ceiling counter described above.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process for CZ termination in the present embodiment. As described above, the effect setting process for CZ end is a process executed when the CZ end command from the main control device 101 is received in the effect setting process at the time of total stop in the display control device 81.

In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2801 to S2823 are the same as the processes of steps S2601 to S2623, and the processes after setting the flag after the end of the second CZ in step S2611 are different. That is, when the second CZ mode is terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous effect after the second preparatory effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is set, and the flag after the end of the second CZ is set in step S2811. After that, in step S2824, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned end avoidance command has been received. When the end avoidance command is received, the value of the ceiling counter included in the end avoidance command is grasped in step S2825, and the value of the ceiling counter is the number of remaining games of the continuous production started in the second CZ mode. It is determined whether or not the value is 13 or less, and more specifically, whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is 13 or less. If the value of the ceiling counter is 14 or more and the ceiling has not been reached yet, that is, if the ceiling counter does not become 0 during the continuous effect being executed, the second preparation start effect A is set as the effect when all stops are performed in step S2826. After executing the setting to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, the effect setting process for ending the CZ is terminated. On the other hand, even when the end avoidance command is not received or the end avoidance command is received, the ceiling counter is 13 or less and the ceiling is reached soon, that is, the continuous production during execution. If the ceiling counter becomes 0 during this period, the setting for the second preparation start effect B to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as the effect at the time of full stop is executed in step S2827, and then the setting is executed. The effect setting process for ending the CZ is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the second preparation start effect A and the second preparation start effect B are set so that, for example, an image in which a face having a different facial expression of the main character is displayed in close-up is displayed. More specifically, in the second preparation start effect A, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the face of the main character is displayed, and in the second preparation start effect B, as shown in FIG. 78 (b). , The eyes of the main character become flames and a enthusiastic face is displayed.

Here, when the first preparation effect corresponding to the second CZ mode ends and the advantageous section ends, it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won in the second CZ mode, and further. It can be said that this is an unfavorable situation for the player because the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, when the first preparation effect corresponding to the second CZ mode is completed and the advantageous section continues, it is possible that the AT mode transition is won in the second CZ mode as well. There is a possibility that the lottery for the end of the advantageous section has not been won, and even if the AT mode transition is not won, the advantageous section will continue, which is considered to be a favorable situation for the player.

However, considering that the first CZ mode is set when the advantageous section ends once and then shifts to the advantageous section again, whether or not the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, that is, whether or not the advantageous section has ended. The relationship with the preference for the player is the opposite of that described above, and it can be said that the case where the advantageous section ends is preferable for the player, and the case where the advantageous section does not end is not preferable for the player. That is, when compared in the case where the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the second CZ mode, it is a preferable event for the player to end the advantageous section.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the second CZ mode started at the timing of ta1, it is assumed that the second CZ mode ends at the timing of ta2 without winning the AT mode transition lottery. In this case, the advantageous section end lottery is performed as described above, and for example, if the end lottery is not won, the advantageous section will continue. Then, at the end of the second CZ mode of ta2, after the second preparation start effect A shown in FIG. 78 (a) is executed, the continuous effect after the second preparation effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is executed. Then, the second preparation effect is switched to the battle effect at the timing of ta4, and the battle effect ends at the timing of ta5. In this case, after the timing of ta2, the AT mode transition lottery using the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal mode is performed, and if the AT mode transition lottery is not won until ta5, the defeat effect is executed at ta5. Will be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the second CZ mode is started at the timing of tb1 and the second CZ mode is terminated at the timing of tb2, the end of the advantageous section executed at the tb2. If the lottery is won, the advantageous section ends at the tb2. Then, at the end of the second CZ mode of the tb2, after the second preparation start effect B shown in FIG. 78 (b) is executed, the continuous effect after the second preparation effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is executed. Then, similarly to FIG. 79 (a) above, the second preparatory effect is switched to the battle effect at the timing of tb4, and the battle effect ends at the timing of tb5. However, if the section is re-shifted to the advantageous section at the timing of tb3, the first CZ mode is set. Therefore, from tb3 to tb4 where the second preparation effect ends, the AT mode shift using the AT mode shift lottery table for the CZ mode is used. Since the lottery is executed, the expectation that the AT mode transition winning will be increased by the amount from ta3 to ta4 in FIG. 79 (a). As a result, by the time the battle effect is completed at tb5, the continuous effect based on the pseudo precursor effect table is switched to the continuous effect based on the precursor effect table, and there is a possibility that the victory effect will be executed at tb5 than in the case of ta5. It gets higher.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured to shift to an advantageous section with a probability of about 1/94.97 per game in the normal section. That is, the normal section from tb2 to tb3 ends in almost one game, and after that, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first CZ mode for a maximum of 10 games up to tb4. That is, although the number of games in which the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the normal mode from ta2 to ta4 is larger than the number of games from tb3 to tb4, the difference is almost one game. Then, in the present embodiment, even if the difference in the number of executed games of the AT mode transition lottery is taken into consideration, the possibility of winning the AT mode transition from tb3 to tb4 is higher than the possibility of winning the AT mode transition from ta2 to ta4. The AT mode transition lottery table for the normal mode and the AT mode transition lottery table for the CZ mode are set so as to be higher than the possibility of becoming. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player when the advantageous section ends once than when the advantageous section continues.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section may not end, so that the first continuous production is performed. Even if it is predicted that the AT mode transition is not won in the situation where the preparatory effect is being executed, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game triggered by the end of the first preparatory effect.

As described above, when the advantageous section ends at the end of the second CZ mode, the first CZ mode is set so that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery when the advantageous section is re-shifted thereafter. On the other hand, if the advantageous section does not end at the end of the second CZ mode, the advantageous section becomes a normal mode in which it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery. That is, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the expectation that the AT mode transition lottery will be won after that once the advantageous section ends is higher. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to end the game at the end of the second CZ mode, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine.

In this case, in the continuous production started with the second CZ mode as a trigger, if the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous production triggered by the second CZ mode straddles an advantageous section. There are cases where it is executed in (when it wins the advantageous section end lottery) and cases where it is executed without straddling the advantageous section (when it does not win the advantageous section end lottery). Then, as described above, it is more advantageous for the player to straddle the advantageous section by the amount of resetting to the first CZ mode than to not straddle the advantageous section. That is, the continuous production performed across the advantageous sections is more advantageous to the player than the continuous production performed without straddling the advantageous sections. By doing so, even if the player grasps that the advantageous section has ended once, the game is stopped as long as the continuous production executed at the end of the advantageous section continues. It becomes difficult. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In the continuous production started with the second CZ mode as a trigger, the transition from the first preparation production to the second preparation production occurs with the end of the second CZ mode as a result of the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode. The continuous production after the corresponding second preparation production will be started. Then, the advantageous section end lottery is executed with the end of the second CZ mode as an opportunity. That is, when the second preparatory effect is started and the subsequent effects correspond to the contents of the AT mode transition lottery before the second preparatory effect, but the second preparatory effect is started. Depending on the result of the advantageous section end lottery, the contents of the AT mode transition lottery after the second preparatory production can be greatly included. By doing so, for example, when the lottery result of the game when the first preparation effect in the second CZ mode is executed does not win the specific combination, the AT mode transition lottery is won. Even if it cannot be expected, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the continuous production after the second preparatory production, and it is possible to more preferably enhance the effect of improving the operating rate by using the continuous production.

In this case, if the advantageous section end lottery is won and the advantageous section ends, the content of the AT mode transition lottery in the first CZ mode to be re-transitioned can be reflected in the continuous production being executed as described above. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of sustaining the expectation for the continuous production after the second preparatory production.

By changing the advantageous section transition lottery table in the normal section and the appearance rate of the game result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery, the number of games staying in the normal section can be changed from the above number of games (about 1 game). The number of games may be large. In this case, since the number of games staying in the normal section increases, the proportion of games in which the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the continuous production during execution also increases. As a result, there is a high possibility that the continuous effect based on the pseudo precursor effect table started at the end of the second CZ mode will not be switched to the precursor effect table by the end of the continuous effect. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the difference in advantage between the case where the advantageous section ends by winning the advantageous section end lottery executed at the end of the second CZ mode and the case where the advantageous section does not end. can.

Further, when the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the second CZ mode as in the above configuration, the second CZ mode is won the AT mode transition lottery rather than the third CZ mode by the configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated via the advantageous section end lottery. Although it is difficult, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the 3rd CZ mode, the advantageous section will always end, while if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the 2nd CZ mode, the advantageous section will not end. From the viewpoint of continuity of the advantageous section, the second CZ mode is more advantageous to the player than the third CZ mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to attract interest in the continuous production triggered by the second CZ mode.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the number of games until the advantageous section ends is determined by the lottery. Then, in the present embodiment, when the effect table is set from the pseudo precursor effect table at the end of the second CZ mode, the effect table is set in consideration of the end game of the advantageous section. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, similarly to steps S2701 to S2713 in the second embodiment, in steps S2901 to S2909, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY update process (step S2902, step S2903). , A process for predicting in advance that the maximum number of games and the maximum number of games will be increased (step S2904, step S2905), a process for ending an advantageous section (step S2907 to step S2909), and the like are executed. If it is determined in step S2906 that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number has not been reached, it is determined in step S2910 whether or not the CZ end game flag is set. When the CZ end game flag is set, it is determined in step S2911 whether or not the third CZ mode flag is set. When the third CZ mode flag is set and the game is the end game of the third CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S2907, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed, and then the second process of displaying this section is ended.

If the third CZ mode flag is not set in step S2911, the process proceeds to step S9712 to determine whether or not the second CZ mode flag is set. If the second CZ mode flag is not set and the game is the end game of the first CZ mode, the section display second process is terminated after the first CZ mode flag is cleared in step S2913.

If the second CZ mode flag is set in step S2912 and the game is the end of the second CZ mode, in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step S2914. In step S2914, a process of clearing the second CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S2915, a process of setting a flag after the second end in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The second post-end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is after the second CZ mode is finished in the advantageous section.

Then, in step S2916, the end delay game number lottery process is executed. The end delay game number lottery process is a process for determining an end delay game from the end of the second CZ mode to the end of the advantageous section. In the delayed game number lottery process, the number of games of one of 1 to 5 games is determined by lottery, and the selection rate of each game is, for example, 20% of each.

The selection rate of each game in the delayed game number lottery is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. For example, the selection rate of each game is such that 5 games are easy to be selected and 1 game is difficult to be selected. It may be uneven. Further, the selection rate of each game may be different depending on the set value. For example, the higher the setting (the higher the setting value, the higher the payout rate), the easier it may be to select a larger number of games. While it is easy to select a large number of games, a small number of games may be easily selected in an odd number setting. Further, the number of games that can be easily selected may be different depending on the lottery result of the game that triggers the end delay game number lottery. For example, the lottery result of this game may be cherry B. It may be easier to select the number of games in the case of A. The lottery result of the game that triggers the end delay game number lottery is not limited to the lottery result of only the end game of the second CZ mode, and the lottery result of each game in the second CZ mode is the end delay game. It may be configured to be reflected in the number lottery, and in this case, it may be configured to execute the end delay game number lottery by using the accumulated points acquired in each game, such as the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode. ..

After executing the end delay game number lottery in step S2916, the process of inputting the end delay game number into the second CZ after end counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S2917. Then, after executing the process of setting the delayed game number command in step S2918, the second process of displaying this section ends. The delay game number command includes information on the number of end delay games determined in step S2916.

If it is determined in step S2910 that the CZ end game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2919. In step S2919, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned second post-end flag is set. If it is set, in step S2920, a process of subtracting 1 from the counter after the end of the second CZ is executed. Then, in step S2921, it is determined whether or not the counter becomes 0 after the end of the second CZ, and if it becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2907, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed, and then the present section is displayed. The second process is terminated. On the other hand, if the flag after the second end is not set in step S2919, or if it is determined in step S2921 that the counter after the end of the second CZ is not 0, the section without ending the advantageous section is not completed. The second display process is terminated.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process for CZ termination in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the effect setting process when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery is different from the first embodiment and the like. That is, the processing of steps S3001 to S3005 is the same as the processing of steps S2601 to S2605, and at the end of the second CZ mode, the precursor start flag is set and the continuous production is performed from the first preparation effect to the second preparation effect. Move to. If the precursor flag is not set in step S3006 and the second CZ mode is terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the pseudo precursor flag is set in step S3007, and a predetermined number is set in the continuous production counter in step S3008. The process of inputting (15) is executed. The processes of steps S3006 to S3008 are the same as the processes of steps S2606 to S2608.

In step S3009, based on the delay game number command received from the main control device 101 side, it is grasped how many games after the current game the advantageous section ends. Then, in step S3010, a process of selecting an effect table in which the fanning effect C in the second preparatory effect occurs in the advantageous section end game from the pseudo precursor effect table is executed, and in step S3011, the address information of the effect table is input. Execute the process to memorize. As already explained, the fanning effect C (FIG. 63 (b3)) is an effect that has a high expectation of winning the AT mode among the effects generated in the second preparatory effect in the continuous effect. It is an effect that is set so that the continuous effect based on the precursor effect table is more likely to occur than the continuous effect based on. That is, in the present embodiment, the fanning effect C having a high expectation of winning the AT mode is generated in the end game of the advantageous section, so that the high degree of attention to the fanning effect C is utilized, which is advantageous. It is possible to successfully camouflage the end of the section. After that, in step S3012, the process of setting the flag after the end of the second CZ is executed, and then the effect setting process for the end of the present CZ is terminated.

More specifically, in step S3010, first, a first extraction process is performed to extract an effect table in which the fanning effect C is generated in the end game of the advantageous section from the plurality of pseudo precursor effect tables. After that, a second extraction process is performed to extract from the extracted effect table the effect table in which the fanning effect C is generated after the second preparatory effect is started and before the end game of the advantageous section. Then, from among the effect tables in which the fanning effect C is generated before the end game of the advantageous section extracted by the second extraction process, the effect table of this continuous effect is determined by lottery. That is, in the present embodiment, after the second preparatory effect is started, the effect table is selected so that the game in which the second and subsequent fanning effect C is generated matches the end game of the advantageous section. ..

Here, after the second preparatory production is started, it is considered that the game is performed with a sense of expectation that any of the fanning effects A to C will occur. It is thought that it is easy for people to pay attention. In this case, if the advantageous section ends in the first game in which the fanning effect C is generated, the degree of concentration of the player on the game increases as the degree of attention to the fanning effect C is increased, and as a result. In addition, it will be easier to notice that the advantageous section has ended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the attention level of the fanning effect C is increased by intentionally avoiding the first fanning effect C so that the game in which the fanning effect C is generated from the second time onward matches the end game of the advantageous section. It is possible to more effectively play the effect of hiding the end game of the advantageous section by using.

In the present embodiment, in the plurality of pseudo precursor effect tables, the pseudo precursor effect table is set so that one of the effect tables is always extracted in the first extraction process, while in the second extraction process, any of them The pseudo precursor effect table is set so that the effect table of is not extracted. Therefore, when the effect table is not extracted in the second extraction process, the effect table for the continuous effect this time is determined from the effect tables extracted in the first extraction process. In this case, the advantageous section ends in the first game in which the fanning effect C is generated after the second preparatory effect is started. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the storage amount of the effect table, and the game in which the fanning effect C is generated and the game in which the end of the advantageous section are not uniquely associated with each other cannot be uniquely associated with each other. The effect of obscuring the end game is also enhanced.

Since the processing of steps S3013 to S3024 is the same as the processing of steps S2612 to S2623, the description thereof will be omitted.

The state of the effect when the advantageous section ends after the end of the second CZ mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 82.

It is assumed that the second CZ mode is started at the timing of ct1 and the second CZ mode is terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery at the timing of ct2. In this case, the end delay game number lottery is executed, and the game to end the advantageous section is determined. For example, when two games are selected as the number of end delay games, the advantageous section ends two games after the end game of the second CZ mode of tk2.

For example, the game following the game in which the second CZ mode ends at the timing of ct3 ends, the game next to the game ended at the timing of ct3 starts at the timing of ct4, and the game ends at the timing of ct5. .. The next game of the game finished at the timing of the tc5 starts at the timing of ct6, the game ends at the timing of ct7, and the next game of the game finished at the timing of the ct7 starts at the timing of ct8.

In this case, the end timing of the game of tc3, ct5, ct7, more specifically, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and all the stops generated based on the OFF operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for the final stop. As a time effect, a fanning effect C may occur. These fanning effects C generated at the end of the game continue until the start timing of the next game of ct4, ct6, ct8, more specifically, after the effective bet operation, until the start lever 41 is operated.

In relation to the lighting / extinguishing timing of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, when the advantageous section ends in the game two games after the end of the second CZ mode, in the end game of the advantageous section. All reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off based on the OFF operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for final stop. Then, for example, in the case of re-shifting to the advantageous section in the next game in which the advantageous section ends and setting to the first CZ mode, at the start of the next game in which the advantageous section ends, that is, after a valid bet operation. , When the start lever 41 is operated, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

That is, the fanning effect C is started at the end timing of the display in the advantageous section by the eighth display segment N8 as the section display, and the fanning effect C is finished at the start timing of the display in the advantageous section.

As described above, when the advantageous section ends at the end of the second CZ mode, the continuous effect by the effect table that generates the fanning effect C with high expectation of winning the AT mode transition in the game where the advantageous section ends is performed. Since the configuration is set so that it is executed across the advantageous section, it is possible to camouflage the end of the advantageous section well with the effect C, and it is possible that the advantageous section has ended or ended. Even if it is detected, it is possible to use the expectation of the fanning effect C to support the continuous production in which the fanning effect C is executed to be confirmed to the end.

The content of the continuous effect generated in the game in which the fanning effect C ends in the advantageous section is determined at the end of the second CZ mode before the end of the advantageous section. In this way, because the setting of the fanning effect C with high expectation is performed before the end of the advantageous section, the setting of the fanning effect C is performed when the advantageous section ends. In comparison, as an impression received by the player, it is difficult to associate the end of the advantageous section with the fanning effect C, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression of a so-called finished race.

The generation timing of the fanning effect C and the extinguishing timing of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display match. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the display by the section display ends due to the occurrence of the fanning effect C in the second preparatory effect. In particular, the timing of occurrence of the fanning effect C depends on the operation timing of the player himself / herself, and is at the timing of the gaming machine (for example, when a predetermined time is reached or when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the game, etc.). It is easier to give the impression generated by the player's own operation than the effect generated. Then, it is considered that the player performs the operation while hoping that the fanning effect C is generated, and the consciousness of the section display is already lowered because he tries to confirm that the fanning effect C is generated. It is considered to be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the display of the section display has ended.

The end timing of the fanning effect C and the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display match. In other words, the fanning effect C has occurred, and the expectation for the AT mode transition winning is raised to the extent that it makes you forget even to confirm whether the advantageous section has ended, and the game of the next game is started as it is. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, it becomes difficult to confirm the display by the section display.

As already explained, since the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section is basically configured to win in one game, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the next game of the game in which the advantageous section is completed. Therefore, the period during which the display of the section display is finished is from the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends to the start of the next game, which overlaps with the timing at which the above-mentioned fanning effect C is generated. By doing so, the period during which the display of the section display is completed can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to preferably suppress the transition to the normal section from being detected.

In the second preparatory effect, various effect tables are set so that the fanning effect C is generated not only in the end game of the advantageous section. Because of this premise, it is expected that the occurrence of the fanning effect C will not be a sign of the end game of the advantageous section, and the effect of hiding the end game of the advantageous section will be expected by using the expectation degree of winning the AT mode transition. It becomes possible.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the second CZ mode, a modified example of shifting from the first preparation effect to the second preparation effect in the game will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a part of the precursor mode setting process in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the number of precursor games is set when it is determined that the second CZ mode flag is set (step S1106: NO) when the game is not won in the immediate notification lottery process (step S1104) (step S1105: NO). The treatment is different from each of the above embodiments.

That is, when the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode is won, the precursor game number lottery process is executed in step S3101. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S1107, and the number of games of any one of 13 games to 15 games is determined by lottery. Then, in step S3102, a process of inputting the lottery result of step S3101 into the precursor counter is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of precursor games is input to the precursor counter without adding the number of remaining games in the second CZ mode.

Then, in step S303, a process of clearing the CZ counter to 0 is executed, and in step S3104, a process of setting the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. After that, the precursor flag is set in step S1109, and the precursor command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1110, and then the precursor mode setting process ends. In this case, the display control device 81 executes the process of setting the precursor flag (step S2203) and the process of inputting the number of precursor games to the continuous effect counter (step S2205) by receiving the precursor command, and issues the CZ end command. Upon receiving the command, the process of performing the continuous effect based on the precursor effect table according to the value of the continuous effect counter is executed (step S2612 to step S2614). As a result, the transition from the first preparatory effect to the second preparatory effect can be caused by the AT mode transition winning in the second CZ mode. Even in this case, the number of games from the start of the second preparatory production to the end of the continuous production is 13 to 15 games as described above, and the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode. If not, the number of games is the same as the number of games from the second preparatory effect to the end game of the continuous effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the continuous production triggered by the second CZ mode, the continuous production is performed from the first preparation production to the second preparation production without exhausting the number of games set at the time of transition to the second CZ mode. Changed to be able to move to. More specifically, the second CZ mode is configured to be set from 8 games to 15 games, but if the game shifts to the second preparatory production within 8 games from the start, the AT mode transition lottery is won. When it is confirmed that the game shifts from the 8th game to the 2nd preparatory production, the AT mode transition lottery may or may not be won. Regarding the case of shifting to the second preparation effect in the specific game after the eighth game, more specifically, the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode is set as the specific number of games in the first place, and the AT mode shifts to the specific game. The case where the lottery is not won and the case where the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode is set as the number of games equal to or higher than the specific game and the AT mode transition lottery is won in the specific game. Since the AT mode transition lottery is executed in each game in the CZ mode, the higher the number of executions of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode, the higher the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery. The closer the game is to the maximum of 15 games, the higher the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery and shifting to the second preparatory production.

Then, in the continuous production started with the second CZ mode as an opportunity, it is expected that the first preparation production will shift to the second preparation production until the seventh game, and after the eighth game, the first preparation production to the second preparation production will be performed. It is possible to realize a novel playability such as expecting not to shift to. Moreover, even in such a configuration, the number of games and the content of the effects after shifting to the second preparatory production are the same as when the second CZ mode is completed without winning the AT mode transition lottery. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be terminated when the 2CZ mode is terminated.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description contents of each embodiment and each modification described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) The number of continuous games in each CZ mode is not limited to the above. For example, the number of continuous games that can be set in the first CZ mode and the number of continuous games that can be set in the second CZ mode may partially or wholly overlap, and the number of continuous games that can be set in the second CZ mode. And the number of continuous games that can be set in the third CZ mode may partially or wholly overlap, and the number of continuous games that can be set in the third CZ mode and the number of continuous games that can be set in the first CZ mode. May overlap in part or in whole. Further, the number of continuous games is larger in the second CZ mode than in the first CZ mode, and the number of continuous games is larger in the third CZ mode than in the second CZ mode. The number of continuous games may be smaller in the third CZ mode than in the second CZ mode. Even in these cases, for example, it is preferable to set the number of games in which the continuous effect triggered by the second CZ mode is executed to be larger than the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode.

(2) On the premise that the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the common AT mode transition lottery table in each CZ mode, the expectation of winning the AT mode transition in each CZ mode is different, but each CZ. The AT mode transition lottery may be performed using the AT mode transition lottery table that is different in each mode or partially different, and then the expectation of winning the AT mode transition in each CZ mode may be different.

(3) In the AT mode transition lottery process for the CZ mode, the points acquired in each game in the CZ mode are used, and the game results of a plurality of games are involved in the AT mode transition lottery through the points. However, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed independently for each game as in the AT mode transition lottery process for the normal mode.

In this case, a CZ counter or the like may be used to change the probability of winning the AT mode transition depending on the progress of the CZ mode, or the probability of winning the AT mode transition in any game in the CZ mode. May be a common configuration.

For example, in the first CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed independently for each game, while in the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode, the game results of a plurality of games are involved in the AT mode transition lottery. As described above, the above configuration may be applied to some CZ modes among the first CZ mode to the third CZ mode, or may be applied to all CZ modes.

(4) Although the AT mode transition lottery is performed in each game in the CZ mode, the AT mode is used in a predetermined game (for example, an end game) in the CZ mode by using the points acquired in each game in the CZ mode. It may be configured to perform a transition lottery. In this case, the number of games until the end of the continuous production may be determined with the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed as an opportunity.

For example, for the first CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in each game of the CZ mode, while for the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in a predetermined game in the CZ mode. As described above, the above configuration may be applied to some CZ modes among the first CZ mode to the third CZ mode, or may be applied to all CZ modes.

(5) Based on the transition to the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery process for the CZ mode is performed and the continuous effect is performed. However, instead of or in addition, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the normal mode. Based on what has been said, a configuration may be used in which continuous production corresponding to the CZ mode is performed. In this case, it is preferable that the effect mode of the continuous effect corresponding to the CZ mode is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the effect mode actually set based on the transition to the CZ mode. Further, the AT mode transition is performed during the execution of the continuous production corresponding to the CZ mode (more specifically, the continuous production using the pseudo precursor table) triggered by the fact that the AT mode transition lottery in the normal mode is not won. If the lottery is won, the continuous effect being executed may be switched to the content corresponding to the AT mode transition winning (more specifically, the continuous effect using the precursor table may be switched).

(6) The continuous production is predetermined according to the part in which the production (treasure box production and weapon confirmation production) corresponding to the game result of each game such as the first preparation production is generated, and the continuous production counter such as the second preparation production. The configuration includes a part in which a production (fanning effect) occurs and a part that informs the result of the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the continuous production such as a battle production or was performed during the continuous production. The effect is to be executed over at least a plurality of games, and any mode may be used as long as the result of the AT mode transition lottery is finally notified.

For example, in the second preparatory effect, the game result of each game may affect the occurrence of the fanning effect. In this case, for example, if the game result of the game after shifting to the second preparation effect is the first result (for example, cherry A), the fanning effect A is likely to occur, and the game result of the game is the second result (for example, cherry A). For example, if the cherry B) is won, the fanning effect B is likely to occur, and if the game result of the game is the third result (for example, cherry C), the fanning effect C is likely to occur. The types of fanning effects A to C that are likely to occur may be associated with each other. Further, for example, by using the points acquired in each game as in the first preparatory production, the game results of a plurality of games indicate the occurrence rate of the fanning effects A to C of the game and the fanning effects A to C generated. It may be configured to affect the type of.

(7) While the number of games can change depending on each continuous production in the first preparation production and the second preparation production, the number of games does not change in the battle production, but the number of games also changes depending on each continuous production in the battle production. It may be a possible configuration. For example, the smaller the number of games in the battle effect, the higher the expectation that the AT mode transition will be won (the battle effect will end as a victory effect), and the larger the number of games, the lower the expectation that the AT mode transition will be won. The reverse may be true. In this case, the number of games of the battle effect and the number of games of the second preparation effect may be combined so that the number of games from the start of the second preparation effect to the end of the battle effect does not change. For example, if the battle effect is configured to be performed over 3 to 5 games, the battle effect is 3 games when the second preparation effect is 10 games, and the second preparation effect is 8 games. Although the number of games of both effects changes, such as the number of battle effects being 5 games, the total number of games of both effects may not change.

(8) In the continuous production triggered by the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode, the timing of shifting from the first preparation production to the second preparation production is set as a game in which the CZ counter in the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode becomes 0. The timing is set when the number of continuous games set at the time of transition to the CZ mode is exhausted, but the timing is not limited to the above. For example, the CZ counter may be set to a predetermined value (for example, 5) larger than 0 to shift to the second preparatory effect, or the predetermined value may be determined by lottery at the time of shifting to the CZ mode or the like. .. Further, after the CZ counter becomes 0, the game corresponding to the predetermined value (for example, 3) may be digested before shifting to the second preparatory effect.

Further, the timing of shifting to the second preparation effect may be different depending on the points acquired in each CZ mode. For example, when the cumulative counter RC becomes a predetermined value (for example, 50) or more, the second preparation effect is performed. The configuration may be such that the transition is made, and the predetermined value may also be determined by lottery at the time of transition to the CZ mode or the like.

In these cases, even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the first preparatory effect can be transitioned to the second preparatory effect before the end of the second CZ mode, which is advantageous at the start of the second preparatory effect. It may happen that it is not decided whether the section can end. Therefore, for example, the value of the cumulative counter RC at the start of the second preparation effect is a predetermined value (for example, 30) or less, and even if the second CZ mode is digested as it is, there is a possibility that the AT mode transition is won during the second CZ mode. If it is low, the second preparation start effect B corresponding to the end of the advantageous section is executed, and the value of the cumulative counter RC at the start of the second preparation effect is larger than the predetermined value by the end of the second CZ mode. If there is a high possibility that the AT mode transition will be won, the second preparation start effect A corresponding to the fact that the advantageous section does not end may be executed.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined value of the cumulative counter RC when the second preparation effect start effect A is executed and the above-mentioned predetermined value of the cumulative counter RC when the second preparation effect start effect B is executed are not the same value. Also, for example, if the cumulative counter RC is equal to or less than the first predetermined value (for example, 30), the second preparation start effect B is executed, and the cumulative counter RC is larger than the first predetermined value (for example, 50). If it is the above, the second preparation start effect A is executed, and if the cumulative counter RC is from the first predetermined value to the second predetermined value, which second preparation start effect is to be executed is determined by a selection lottery. May be good.

Further, the second preparation start effect may be executed by lottery regardless of the value of the cumulative counter RC. In this case, if the value of the cumulative counter RC is small, the second preparation start effect B is likely to be selected, and the cumulative counter RC. If the value of is large, the second preparation start effect A may be easily selected.

(9) The precursor effect table or the pseudo precursor effect table may include an effect table having a pattern in which the second preparatory effect is executed but the battle effect is not performed. In this case, the pseudo precursor effect table may have a configuration in which the pattern in which the battle effect is not performed is more easily selected than the precursor effect table, and the precursor effect table does not select the pattern in which the battle effect is not performed (precursor). The production table may not include a production table with a pattern in which no battle production is performed).

(10) In the precursor effect table and the pseudo precursor effect table, a game in which none of the fanning effects A to C is generated during the second preparatory production is included, but a configuration in which some kind of fanning effect A to C is generated in each game. May be.

(11) In the continuous production, the battle production is performed after the first preparation production and the second preparation production. For example, the first preparation production and the battle production are performed, but the second preparation production is not performed. , Or may not be performed. Further, while the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are not performed, the battle effect may be performed. For example, the first preparatory effect is started at the start of the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode, the first preparatory effect is completed at the end of the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode, and the battle using the precursor effect table or the pseudo precursor effect table is used. In the configuration in which the production content up to the end game of the production is determined, the start game and end game of the battle production and the production content of the battle production are determined at the start of the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode, while the second preparation production is performed. The content of the effect may not be determined, the second preparatory effect may be set not to be executed, or the battle effect may be executed through the second preparatory effect by lottery. good. When deciding not to execute the second preparatory effect, the same effect as in the normal game may be executed until the battle effect is started after the end of the first preparatory effect, or the battle effect may be executed. It may be configured so that an expected effect (precursor effect) that is expected to occur can occur. In this case, as in (9) above, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a pattern in which the battle effect is not performed can be included as the pattern of the continuous effect. If the effect content of the second preparatory effect is not determined, the second preparatory effect is executed, but in the second preparatory effect, regardless of the result of the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the setting of the continuous effect. The configuration may be such that the fanning effects A to C can be generated according to the game result of each game.

(12) The result of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode is notified via the continuous effect started from the CZ mode, but the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode is finally final after the end of the CZ mode. Any configuration may be used as long as it is notified to. For example, when the second CZ mode is terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is in the advantageous section after the advantageous section terminated based on the termination of the second CZ mode. Any configuration may be used as long as it is finally notified. Further, when the first CZ mode is terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is finally after the first CZ mode and during the advantageous section in which the first CZ mode is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as it is notified to. In these cases, the notification about the result of the AT mode transition lottery may be executed across the advantageous section or may be executed without straddling the advantageous section, or the first CZ in which the advantageous section does not end may be executed. By configuring both the mode result notification and the second CZ mode result notification to be executed after the end of the CZ mode, it is possible to successfully hide the end of the advantageous section by continuous production. be.

(13) The configuration is such that continuous production (second preparation production) can be executed even in a game that starts in the normal section, but in a game that starts in the normal section, a different production from the second preparation production is performed. May be good.

(14) The explanation has been made on the premise that the first preparatory effect is shifted to the second preparatory effect at the end of the second CZ mode and the continuous effect is terminated in the re-shifted advantageous section. When it is finished, it does not deny the composition that the continuous production can be finished before re-shifting to the advantageous section. That is, for example, if the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is not won endlessly, there may be a case where the continuous effect set at the end of the advantageous section is not completed and the section is not re-shifted to the advantageous section. In this case, the effect mode of the continuous effect when re-shifting to the advantageous section and the effect mode of the continuous effect when the re-shift to the advantageous section may be common or different. ..

(15) Using the precursor effect table and the pseudo precursor effect table, the effect content of each game is set in advance according to the value of the continuous effect counter, but the final battle effect result is in advance. However, the production content of each game up to that point may be determined individually for each game. In this case, if the result of the AT mode transition lottery that triggers the continuous production is the AT mode transition winning, the production content of each game is set to, for example, a mode in which the fanning effect C is likely to occur, and the AT mode is not won. For example, it may be configured to be set to a mode in which the fanning effect A is likely to occur, or it may be configured to individually determine the effect content of each game according to these set modes.

(16) In the second preparatory production, the fanning effect C is started at the end of the game and continued until the start of the next game, but the fanning effect C is configured to be executable over a plurality of games. A configuration in which the advantageous section ends after the effect C is started or when the fanning effect C starts, and the fanning effect C ends when the game shifts to the advantageous section or shifts to the advantageous section before the fanning effect C ends. May be. In this case, the fanning effect C itself may be executed over a plurality of games, the suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the fanning effect C may be executed before the fanning effect C, or the fanning effect C may be executed. As a configuration in which the afterglow effect for notifying the afterglow of the execution of is executed after the fanning effect C, a series of effects including the fanning effect C may be executed over a plurality of games. Further, the number of continuous games of the above-mentioned series of effects may be different depending on the type of the fanning effects A to C, and the number of continuous games of the above-mentioned series of effects is larger in the fanning effect C than in the fanning effect A. The configuration should be easy.

(17) In the second preparatory effect, the effect table is selected so that the fanning effect C is executed in the end game of the advantageous section, but the fanning effect B and the fanning effect A are performed in the ending game of the advantageous section. The effect table may be selected so as to be executed, and the types of fanning effects A to C executed in the advantageous section end game are cumulative counters in the second CZ mode that trigger the start of the second preparation effect. The configuration differs depending on the value of RC and the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode that triggers the start of the second preparatory production, and the types of fanning effects A to C executed in the advantageous section end game are selected by lottery. The ease of selection may differ depending on the value of the cumulative counter RC and the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode. In this case, the larger the value of the cumulative counter RC and the larger the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode, the easier it is to select the fanning effect C as the fanning effect of the end game of the advantageous section.

(18) The AT mode transition lottery may be performed even in the normal section. In this case, the superiority of the advantageous section is guaranteed by configuring the normal section to be less likely to win the AT mode transition than the advantageous section.

(19) A continuous effect may be executed by using the AT mode transition lottery in the normal mode in the advantageous section as an opportunity. In this case, the content of the continuous production triggered by the AT mode transition lottery in the normal mode and the continuous production triggered by each CZ mode, the number of games of the continuous production, and the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the continuous production. The number of games from the execution of is executed to the end of the continuous production may be common or different.

(20) When the AT mode transition is won during the second CZ mode, the number of precursor games differs depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning of the AT mode transition lottery, the cumulative counter RC value, and the CZ counter value. It may be configured. For example, when the AT mode transition lottery is won with Cherry A as an opportunity, a short precursor game number is easily selected, and when the AT mode transition lottery is won with Cherry B as an opportunity, a long precursor game number is easily selected. May be. In addition, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in a situation where the cumulative counter RC value is large, a short precursor game number is likely to be selected, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won in a situation where the cumulative counter RC value is small, it is long. The configuration may be such that the number of precursor games can be easily selected. If the AT mode transition lottery is won with a large CZ counter value, a short precursor game is likely to be selected, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won with a small CZ counter value, a long precursor game is selected. The configuration may be such that the number can be easily selected. The relationship between the length of these precursor games may be reversed.

(21) The winning probability of the immediate notification lottery is determined by the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning of the AT mode transition lottery, the value of the cumulative counter RC, the value of the CZ counter, the display mode (CZ mode, normal mode), and the CZ mode. It may be configured to be different depending on the type. For example, the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode may be configured to be easier to win the immediate notification lottery than the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode.

(22) The execution opportunity of the continuous production has been described as an AT mode transition lottery or a transition to the CZ mode, but it is sufficient as long as it notifies the determination result of whether or not an event advantageous to the player is caused. For example, the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode may be used as an opportunity to execute the continuous production.

(23) When the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the configuration is set to the CZ mode (second CZ mode) immediately, but the configuration may be set to the CZ mode via the precursor mode.

(24) In the CZ mode transition lottery, if the number of advantageous section games AG is 30 or less, the CZ mode transition lottery is not won, but it may be possible to win, and in this case, it is 31 or more. It is advisable to set the winning probability to be lower than in the case. Further, when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the situation where the advantageous section game number AG is 30 or less, after the advantageous section game number AG becomes 31 or more, that is, the first CZ mode at the time of the advantageous section transition is triggered. It may be configured to shift to the CZ mode after waiting for the end of the continuous production.

(25) Depending on the presence or absence of the flag after the end of the second CZ, the CPU 181 can determine whether the end of the previous advantageous section is via the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode. In addition to setting the flag after the end of the 3rd CZ in the various flag storage areas 183a at the end, the type of CZ mode that triggered the end of the previous advantageous section depends on which CZ end flag is set. The configuration may be such that the CPU 181 can be discriminated.

(26) The advantageous section ends in the end game of the second CZ mode, or the advantageous section ends via the delay game after the end of the second CZ mode, but the game after the end of the second CZ mode. The advantageous section ends when the lottery result becomes a predetermined end result (for example, normal lip A), or when the lottery result of the game is a predetermined end result and the predetermined end result winning is established. It may be configured.

(27) In the continuous effect setting process, the continuous effect counter is updated (subtracted) for each game, and the effect set in various effect tables is executed with one game as one unit. The effect may be executed with the game as one unit, or the effect may be executed with the lottery result of the game as a predetermined result (for example, the push order bell) as one unit.

(28) In the 2nd CZ mode and the 3rd CZ mode, if the number of continuous games set at the start of the 2nd CZ mode and the 3rd CZ mode is exhausted without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section can be ended. However, the end lottery for whether to end the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode is executed during the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode, and the AT mode transition lottery is not won and the end lottery is won. By doing so, the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode may be terminated and the advantageous section may be terminated.

(29) Although the continuous effect is executed by the notification means such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the continuous effect may be executed by a notification means different from these notification means. In particular, by using separate notification means for the notification means for executing the push order notification effect and the specific combination notification effect and the notification means for executing the continuous effect, the presence / absence of transition to the AT mode, the push order bell, and the specification Events with different interests of the player, such as whether or not a player has missed a role, are notified by different notification means. For example, too much attention is paid to continuous production, so a push order bell or a stop switch when a specific role is won. It is possible to suppress an event in which operations 42 to 44 are mistaken.

(30) In a configuration in which the advantageous section end lottery is executed at the end of the second CZ mode and the advantageous section can be ended, if the ceiling counter is equal to or less than a predetermined value and the ceiling is near, even if the advantageous section end lottery is not won. The configuration is such that the second preparation start effect B, which has a high expectation of winning the AT mode transition, is executed. 2 The selection rate may be different from that of the preparation start effect B, and the smaller the value of the ceiling counter, the easier it is to select the second preparation start effect B.

(31) When the ceiling counter is not equal to or less than the predetermined value and the lottery for ending the advantageous section is not won, the second preparation start effect B different from the second preparation start effect A at the end of the advantageous section when the value is larger than the predetermined value. However, if the ceiling counter is less than or equal to the predetermined value and the lottery for the end of the advantageous section is won, the effect different from the effect at the end of the advantageous section when the value is larger than the predetermined value is executed. May be good.

(32) The continuous effect triggered by the second CZ mode includes the normal section and the first CZ mode, but the configuration is such that the continuous effect can be executed so as to include a plurality of CZ modes and the normal section. The type of CZ mode included and the order of the plurality of included CZ modes and the normal section are not limited to those described above. For example, each game such as 2nd CZ mode-> normal section-> 2nd CZ mode, 2nd CZ mode-> 2nd CZ mode-> normal section, normal section-> 1st CZ mode-> 2nd CZ mode, 3rd CZ mode-> normal section-> 1st CZ mode. The configuration may include continuous production. Further, the number of included CZ modes is not limited to two, and may be three or more. These configurations do not exclude that the normal mode in the advantageous section is included in the continuous production, and the normal mode → the second CZ mode → the normal section → the second CZ mode → the normal mode, the second CZ mode → the normal mode → the second CZ. Mode-> normal section, normal section-> 1st CZ mode-> 2nd CZ mode-> normal mode, 3rd CZ mode-> normal section-> 1st CZ mode-> normal mode, etc. A configuration in which a normal mode exists may be used. However, it is preferable that the normal mode in the advantageous section is not continuous with the normal section. Further, it is preferable to set the continuous effect so that the start of the continuous effect is not the normal mode or the normal section but the CZ mode.

(33) If the flag is set after the end of the second CZ at the start of the first CZ mode, the configuration is such that the continuous effect that has already been started is taken over, but depending on the type of CZ mode that triggered the end of the previous advantageous section. , The configuration may be such that the effect mode at the start of the first CZ mode (at the time of transition to the advantageous section) is different. May be configured to set, and the notification mode (background, sound effect, etc.) of the first preparation effect may be different depending on the presence or absence of the flag after the end of the second CZ mode.

(34) By winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the second CZ mode is set, and when the AT mode ends, the third CZ mode is set. However, by winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the third CZ mode is set. It may be a configuration to be set or a configuration to be set to either the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode, a configuration to be set to the second CZ mode when the AT mode is terminated, or a configuration to be set to either the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode. It may be a configuration that can be set. Further, the configuration may be set to the second CZ mode in either case of winning the CZ mode transition lottery or ending the AT mode. In this case, the configuration does not include the third CZ mode. good.

(35) When the advantageous section ends with the end of the second CZ mode, the flag is set after the end of the second CZ, and when the advantageous section ends with the end of the third CZ mode, after the end of the second CZ. Although the flag is not set, the end lottery of the third CZ mode is executed in the third CZ mode, and the third CZ mode can be terminated before the CZ counter becomes 0, and then the third CZ mode is set. Depending on the remaining status of the CZ counter at the end of the second CZ and the remaining status of the CZ effect counter, the flag may be set after the end of the second CZ. For example, if the end of the third CZ mode is in a situation where the CZ effect counter becomes 0 or is near 0, the flag is set after the end of the second CZ, in the continuous effect started with the third CZ mode as an opportunity. It is possible to configure the continuous effect after the second preparatory effect to be executed in the first CZ mode to be transferred thereafter. That is, regardless of the type of CZ mode that triggered the end of the advantageous section, whether or not to take over the continuous effect in the next advantageous section depending on the progress of the continuous effect that triggered the end of the advantageous section. It may be configured to be different.

(36) The continuous effect is set so that the fanning effect C is generated in the advantageous section end game, but the continuous effect is set so that the fanning effect C is generated in the advantageous section transition game. May be good. As described above, since the advantageous section transition lottery is basically configured to win in one game, the next game of the advantageous section end game grasped from the number of end delay games is set as the advantageous section transition game, and the advantageous section is said. It is preferable to extract the effect table in which the fanning effect C is generated in the transition game from the pseudo precursor effect table.

(37) End of advantageous section The continuous effect is set in advance (at the end of the second CZ mode) so that the fanning effect C occurs in the game, but the advantageous section ends regardless of the set effect table. The configuration may be such that the fanning effect C is executed in the game, the fanning effect C may be executed in the advantageous section transition game, or the fanning effect C may be executed in the game started in the normal section. May be.

(38) The game by the 3-bet game performed in the state where the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game is carried over is described as a normal game, but it depends on the 2-bet game performed in the state where the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game is carried over. The game may be a normal game, or the second bet game or the third bet game played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB may be a normal game. Further, a game by a 2-bet game performed in a state where the second BB is carried over may be a normal game, or a game by a 3-bet game performed in a state where the first BB is carried over may be a normal game. Further, the game may be advanced while switching each of these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, based on the first switching opportunity, for example, any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game is switched to any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game, and based on the second switching opportunity, for example. Switching from any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game to any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game may be regarded as a normal game.

(39) The setting mode of the continuous production may be different depending on whether or not the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over. For example, even in a game based on a 3-bet game, in a situation where the second BB winning is not carried over, the continuous production setting triggered by the start or end of the CZ mode shown in each of the above embodiments is not performed, and the second BB is not set. In the situation where the winning is carried over, the continuous production may be set with the start or end of the CZ mode as a trigger.

(40) Depending on whether or not the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over, the presence or absence of the end of the advantageous section at the end of the CZ mode may be different. For example, even if the game is a 3-bet game, if the 2nd BB winning is not carried over, the advantageous section ends even if the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. However, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode is terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the advantageous section may be terminated.

(41) The winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery and the game result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery are not limited to the above. For example, the number of games required to win the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section may be two or more games on average.

In addition, although the configuration is such that the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery shifts to the advantageous section, the configuration may be such that the game shifts to the advantageous section in the next game of the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery. A predetermined number of games may exist between the winning game and the game shifting to the advantageous section.

Further, in the game of shifting to the advantageous section, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is started, but in the next game of the game of shifting to the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is started. The display may be started, or a predetermined number of games may exist between the game for shifting to the advantageous section and the game for starting the display of the eighth display segment N8.

In these cases, until after the continuous effect (second continuous effect) set before the end of the advantageous section shifts to at least the advantageous section, or after the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started as the section display. It is preferable that the configuration is continuous, and in the configuration in which the fanning effect C is executed according to the advantageous section end game, after the fanning effect C itself or the corresponding effect shifts to the advantageous section, or for the eighth display. It is preferable that the configuration continues until after the display of the segment N8 is started.

(42) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value, and the setting 1 is configured to have the lowest ball ejection rate and the setting 6 is configured to have the highest ball ejection rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in the settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases in a short time and the amount of balls ejected decreases in a long time, and in the settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The reduction of a predetermined amount may be shorter than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the ball output hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(43) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a reel and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to one line in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be five lines.

(44) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball throwing and ball paying out function such as a pachinko machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type gaming machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The pachinko machine has, for example, a variable ball-entry means that can switch between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter or cannot enter than the open state. In a configuration in which a round game in which the variable ball entry means is opened when the lottery is won shifts to a hit state in which the round game can be executed multiple times, the game ball entered in the variable ball entry means passes through the specific passing portion. (Occurrence of V winning), the gaming state after the hit state shifts to an advantageous state such that the winning probability of the predetermined winning / failing determination is increased, and the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through a specific state. If the game does not pass through the section (non-occurrence of V winning), the gaming state after the winning state shifts to a non-advantageous state such that the winning probability of the predetermined winning / failing determination is lower than that in the advantageous state. It is also possible to apply each of the above inventions to sex. In this case, the result notification of the passage determination as to whether or not the passage is passed is executed during the round game in which the passage determination is made, and the round after the round game in which the passage determination is made. By providing a case of executing in a game, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the round game in which the passing judgment is made but also to the subsequent round games by utilizing the psychology of the player who wants to know the result of the passing judgment. It will be possible. Further, there are cases where the result notification of the passage determination is executed during the round game in which the passage determination is made, and cases where the result notification is executed in the round game after the round game in which the passage determination is made. By standardizing the modes and the period from the passage determination to the execution of the result notification, whether the notification is performed across the round games depending on the production mode and the period until the result notification. Whether or not it is difficult to specify, and it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict the result of the passage determination.

(45) In the above embodiment, a gaming machine of a type in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is exemplified by inserting a medal as a game medium and setting the number of bets to start the game. However, this does not deny the medalless type gaming machines that do not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a virtual gaming medium (predetermined gaming value) can be used to set the number of bets on the game so that the game can be started, and the above-mentioned privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is described above. It is preferable to use a configuration in which a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals is given. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which the game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it may be configured to notify information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set. ,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
Specific notification means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification about the result of specific determination by the specific determination means by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), and
Equipped with
The termination condition includes that the result of the predetermined specific determination is a predetermined result (AT mode non-winning) different from the specific result.
The specific notification means is
When the specific determination is executed by the specific determination means, the first specific notification means (second CZ mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification in the specific state in which the specific determination is executed is triggered. A function to execute a winning effect in a continuous effect, a function to execute a defeat effect in a continuous effect triggered by the first CZ mode by the display control device 81), and
When the specific determination is executed by the specific determination means, after the specific state in which the specific determination is executed is transferred to the normal state by the specific termination means and then to the specific state by the specific transition means. A second specific notification means (a function of executing a defeat effect in a continuous effect triggered by the second CZ mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the specific determination.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, the player's attention is focused on the specific notification as the result notification of the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is generated. On the other hand, when the specific notification is executed because the result of the specific determination is a non-winning of the specific result and the specific state ends accordingly, the game is terminated with the specific notification as an opportunity. There is a possibility that it will end up. Therefore, in the above configuration, the result of the specific determination is notified in the specific state in which the specific determination is made, and in the case where the specific determination is made, instead of the specific state in which the specific determination is made, once the state is changed to the normal state and then the result is restarted. Since there are cases where notification is made in the transitioned specific state, the notification as a result of the specific judgment will not be linked to the end of the specific state, and the end of the specific state will be detected from the specific notification. It can be preferably avoided.

Moreover, by adopting the above configuration, even if the player grasps the end of the specific state, the player who wants to confirm the result of the specific determination executed before that is as follows. It is considered that the game is continued until a specific state, that is, at least until a specific notification is performed. Then, for example, if the specific determination is made again in the next specific state, even if the result of the specific determination is not the specific result, it can be expected that the game will be continued until the next specific state. By using the specific notification as a bridge between the specific state and the specific state, it is possible to suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of the specific state. Further, even if the game is terminated with the end of the specific state, the gaming machine that is vacant in the normal state is determined to be specified in the specific state before the transition to the normal state. There is a high possibility that the result has not been notified yet, and it can be expected that the game will be started in anticipation of the result notification. That is, in any case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine and improve the interest of the gaming.

Feature A2. The second specific notification means starts the specific notification in the specific state in which the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is executed, and ends the specific notification in the specific state that shifts thereafter. The gaming machine according to the feature A1, which is characterized by being capable of.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed straddling the specific state in which the specific judgment is performed and the specific state that shifts thereafter, and the player's psychology that wants to confirm the result of the specific judgment is used. Even if the specific state ends, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game until the transition to the next specific state occurs. Moreover, in the above configuration, since the specific notification is started before the specific state in which the specific determination is made ends, it is easy to recognize that the specific determination has been made, and the specific notification can be easily recognized. It is possible to make it easier to feel the feeling of confirming the result.

Feature A3. The second specific notification means performs the specific notification even after the transition from the specific state in which the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is executed to the normal state and before the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized by being executable.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed across the specific states, the specific notification can be executed even after the transition from the specific state to the normal state and before the transition to the specific state again. By doing so, if only the specific notification is seen, it is not possible to distinguish between the specific state and the normal state, and the specific notification is performed across the specific states, or the specific notification is performed without straddling the specific states. It is possible to more preferably enjoy the effect of making it difficult to understand whether or not it is being performed.

Feature A4. Mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification by the specific notification means (in the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81, a process of selecting an effect table for continuous effect from a precursor effect table or a pseudo precursor effect table is executed. Function)
The mode setting means cannot distinguish or discriminate between the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the first specific notification means and the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the second specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is characterized in that it can be set as a notification mode that makes it difficult.

According to the above configuration, there are cases where the specific notification is performed during the specific state in which the specific determination is made and cases where the specific notification is performed in the specific state after the specific state in which the specific determination is made. It becomes difficult to specify from the notification mode. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the end of the specific state from the notification mode of the specific notification, and it is possible to preferably avoid the end of the game triggered by the end of the specific state.

In addition, it is also possible to express "a notification mode that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify" as "a common notification mode", "the same notification mode", or "a notification mode in which the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify". Is. The same applies to the above expressions used in other features.

Feature A5. The mode setting means includes a selection means for selecting a notification mode group (effect table) of the present specific notification from a plurality of predetermined notification mode groups (precursor effect table, pseudo precursor effect table).
The selection means is a notification mode group selected when the specific notification is performed by the first specific notification means, and a notification mode group selected when the specific notification is performed by the second specific notification means. , A common notification mode group is set to be selectable (for example, an effect table selected from a pseudo precursor effect table when the AT mode transition lottery in the first CZ mode is not won, and a second CZ mode. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which is common to the effect table selected from the pseudo precursor effect table when the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

As in the above configuration, the notification mode group of the present specific notification is selected from a plurality of predetermined mode notification groups, and then the specific notification of the first specific notification means and the second specific notification means is performed. By configuring the system so that a common notification mode group can be selected when setting the notification mode, it is possible to realize common notification modes among specific notifications having different execution timings while ensuring the variety of notification modes. can.

Feature A6. The specific notification means has a configuration in which, after the specific notification is started, the result notification corresponding to the result of the specific determination that triggered the specific notification is executed, and then the specific notification is terminated.
The mode setting means is
The notification mode is set according to the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification.
Regardless of the result of the specific determination, the notification modes of the specific notification at least after the specific notification is started and before the result notification is performed are the specific notification by the first specific notification means and the specific notification. It is possible to set the notification mode so that it can be a common notification mode with the specific notification by the second specific notification means (for example, when the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode is won, it is a precursor. The production content other than the final result of the battle production can be common between the production table selected from the production table and the production table selected from the pseudo precursor production table when the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode is not won. ) The gaming machine according to the feature A4 or the feature A5.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to discriminate the result of the specific determination at a stage prior to the result notification from the start of the specific notification to the execution of the result notification corresponding to the result of the specific determination. By doing so, in a configuration in which the specific notification for the specific determination may be performed across the specific states, it becomes difficult to notice from the notification mode of the specific notification that the specific state ends once. Then, when the specific notification is performed across the specific states, the result notification of the specific notification is executed in the re-shifted specific state. Therefore, in order to confirm the result notification, the game is played up to the re-shifted specific state. There will be a need to continue. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the game to end when the specific state ends, and if the game is re-shifted to the specific state, there is a high possibility that the game will continue as it is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Feature A7. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods (games).
Period setting means for setting the number of execution periods, which is the number of unit execution periods of the specific notification by the specific notification means (in the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81, the number of games until the end of the continuous effect is input to the continuous effect counter. Has a function to execute processing)
The period setting means has a common number of execution periods when the specific notification is executed by the first specific notification means and the number of execution periods when the specific notification is executed by the second specific notification means. It is possible to set the number of execution periods to be (the display control device 81 has 13 to 13 games from the start of the second preparatory effect to the end of the continuous effect in any of the continuous effects. 15. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that it is set to be 15.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which specific notification is performed over a plurality of unit execution periods, the number of execution periods of specific notification is performed regardless of whether or not the execution of specific determination and the execution of specific notification straddle a specific state. Can be the same number. Therefore, for example, even if the number of execution periods of the specific notification is large or small, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the specific notification straddles a specific state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of the specific state by using the specific notification.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the second specific notification means starts the specific notification in the specific state in which the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is executed in the specific state of the re-migrated side after the specific determination is made in the previous specific state, the start of the specific notification becomes the previous specific state and is specified. Specific notification will be performed across the states. In such a configuration, since the number of execution periods for which the specific notification is performed is standardized regardless of whether or not the specific state is straddled, the specific notification is started regardless of whether or not the specific state is straddled. Then, you can expect to execute the game for the same number of execution periods. In other words, even if it is unknown at the start of the specific notification whether or not it straddles a specific state, the specific notification will end if at least a common number of execution period games is played, so that the game will continue until then. It is thought that it will be done. Then, as a result of the continuation, the game has shifted to a specific state in which a specific event can occur, and it is difficult to end the game in that situation. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Feature A9. The period setting means includes the number of execution periods in the specific notification when the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification by the first specific notification means is the specific result, and the identification by the second specific notification means. When the result of the specific determination that triggers the notification is a predetermined result (AT non-winning) different from the specific result, the number of execution periods in the specific notification may be set to be a common number of execution periods. It is possible (the display control device 81 has the number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect when the AT mode is won during the second CZ mode to the end of the continuous effect, and the AT mode during the second CZ mode. The number of games from the start of the second preparatory production to the end of the continuous production in the case of non-winning is set to be 13 to 15). The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether or not the specific state is crossed, whether or not the specific state is crossed in a situation where the result of the specific determination is different in the configuration in which the number of execution periods of the specific notification is standardized. However, the number of execution periods of specific notification is standardized. By doing so, when the specific notification is performed, not only it becomes difficult to detect the end of the specific state from the number of execution periods, but also the result of the specific judgment can be predicted from the number of execution periods. It will be difficult.

Feature A10. The period setting means includes the number of execution periods in the specific notification when the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification by the first specific notification means is a predetermined result (AT non-winning), and the second specific notification. It is possible to set the number of execution periods in the specific notification when the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification by the means is the predetermined result to be a common number of execution periods (display control). The device 81 is the number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect when the AT mode is not won during the first CZ mode to the end of the continuous effect, and when the AT mode is not won during the second CZ mode. The number of games from the start of the second preparatory production to the end of the continuous production is set to be 13 to 15). Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the number of execution periods of the specific notification is standardized regardless of whether or not the specific state is crossed, whether or not the specific state is crossed in the situation where the result of the specific determination is the same. However, the number of execution periods of specific notification is standardized. By doing so, when the specific notification is performed, not only it becomes difficult to detect the end of the specific state from the number of execution periods, but also the result of the specific judgment can be predicted from the number of execution periods. It will be difficult.

Feature A11. When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means, the execution number setting means for setting the number of executions of a predetermined game from the execution of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification to the execution of the specific notification. (A function to execute a process of inputting the number of games until the end of the continuous effect to the continuous effect counter in the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81).
The execution number setting means executes the specific determination (for example, the AT mode transition lottery in the end game of the second CZ mode) that triggers the specific notification when the specific notification is performed by the second specific notification means. The number of executions from the time until the specific notification is executed, and the specific determination (for example, the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode) that triggers the specific notification when the specific notification is performed by the first specific notification means. It is possible to set the number of executions from the execution of the AT mode transition lottery in the end game to the execution of the specific notification to be a common number of executions (the display control device 81 has a common number of executions). In any of the continuous productions, the number of games from the start of the second preparatory production to the end of the continuous production is set to be 13 to 15). The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether or not the execution of the specific determination and the execution of the specific notification straddle the specific state, after the specific determination is made, until the specific notification corresponding to the specific determination is executed. The number of executions of the predetermined game may be the same number of executions. Therefore, for example, even if the number of executions from the specific determination to the specific notification is large or small, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the specific notification straddles the specific state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of the specific state by using the specific notification.

When the above configuration is applied to any of the features A7 to A10, the "period setting means" and the "execution number setting means" may be the same means. In this case, it does not prevent that the "number of execution periods" and the "number of executions" and the "unit execution period" and the "predetermined game" represent the same configuration. That is, when "the specific notification means can execute the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods" and, for example, "the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is executed", the specific notification means is executed. If the configuration is such that "the specific notification is started", the "number of execution periods" set by the "period setting means" and the "number of executions" set by the "execution number setting means" are the same number. Become. Further, for example, when there is a time lag between "the specific determination that triggers the specific notification" and "the start of the specific notification", the "number of execution periods" and "the number of execution periods" set by the "period setting means" The number is different from the "execution number" set by the "execution number setting means". The same applies to the above expressions used in other features.

Feature A12. The execution number setting means includes the number of executions in the specific notification when the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification by the first specific notification means is a predetermined result (AT non-winning), and the second specific notification. It is possible to set the number of executions in the specific notification when the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification by the means is the predetermined result to be a common number of executions (display control device 81). Is the number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect when the AT mode is not won during the first CZ mode to the end of the continuous effect, and the first when the AT mode is not won during the second CZ mode. 2 The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the number of games from the start of the preparatory production to the end of the continuous production is set to be 13 to 15).

According to the above configuration, the result of the specific determination is obtained in the configuration in which the number of executions of the predetermined game from the specific determination to the execution of the specific notification is common regardless of whether or not the specific state is straddled. Regarding whether or not to straddle a specific state in a situation where the same result is obtained, the number of executions from the specific determination to the execution of the specific notification is standardized. By doing so, when the specific notification is performed, it is difficult not only to detect the end of the specific state from the number of executions, but also to predict the result of the specific judgment from the number of executions. Become.

Feature A13. The execution number setting means includes the number of executions in the specific notification when the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification by the first specific notification means is the specific result, and the identification by the second specific notification means. It is possible to set the number of executions in the specific notification to be a common number when the result of the specific determination that triggers the notification is a predetermined result (AT non-winning) different from the specific result. (The display control device 81 has the number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect when the AT mode is won during the second CZ mode to the end of the continuous effect, and the AT mode non-winning during the second CZ mode. The number of games from the start of the second preparatory effect to the end of the continuous effect is set to be 13 to 15). Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the result of the specific determination is different in the configuration in which the number of game executions from the specific determination to the execution of the specific notification is common regardless of whether or not the specific state is straddled. The number of executions until the specific notification is executed is also standardized as to whether or not the specific state is crossed in the resulting situation. By doing so, when the specific notification is performed, it is difficult not only to detect the end of the specific state from the number of executions, but also to predict the result of the specific judgment from the number of executions. Become.

Feature A14. If the result of the specific determination is not the specific result, the specific notification may be executed by the first specific notification means, and the specific notification may be executed by the second specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the specific determination is not won, the specific notification may be performed not only when the specific notification is performed across the specific states but also without straddling the specific states. Is clarified. In other words, there is no one-to-one relationship between the success or failure of the specific judgment and whether or not it straddles the specific state, and even if the result of the specific judgment is non-winning, the specific notification is always performed across the specific state. By not doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult to associate that the end of the specific state is not won in the specific judgment.

Feature A15. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods (games).
The result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is not the specific result, and the result of the specific determination executed by the specific determination means during the execution of the specific notification is the specific result. If there is, a change means (a process of replacing the continuous effect using the pseudo precursor effect table by the display control device 81 with the continuous effect using the precursor effect table) that can change the specific notification being executed to the notification corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A14, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the specific determination that triggered the execution of the specific notification is not won, if the specific determination is made again during the specific notification, the specific determination made again is won. , The content of the specific notification corresponding to the running non-winning is changed to the content of the winning side. By doing so, even if the content of the specific notification or even if it is predicted that the specific judgment is not won because the specific state has ended once, the content of the specific notification is being executed. May be replaced, and it is possible to entertain the specific notification to the end.

Feature A16. A specific number corresponding to the number of unit execution periods of the specific notification by the specific notification means, or the number of executions of a predetermined game from the execution of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification to the end of the specific notification. Is provided with a specific number setting means (a function of executing a process of inputting the number of games until the end of the continuous effect to the continuous effect counter in the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81).
When the changing means changes the specific notification during execution, it is possible to change the notification content without changing the specific number set by the specific number setting means before the change. The gaming machine according to the feature A15.

According to the above configuration, even if the content is changed in the middle of the specific notification, the specific number is not changed until the specific notification is finally completed, so that it is difficult to grasp the change in the middle. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of entertaining the specific notification to the end.

Feature A17. As the specific state, the high specific state (CZ mode) in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is likely to be the specific result, and the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means rather than the high specific state is the specific result. A low specific state (normal mode) that is difficult to become is set,
When shifting from the normal state to the specific state, the specific transition means executes a means capable of shifting to the high specific state (a process of setting to the first CZ mode at the time of transition to an advantageous section by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, since the high specific state may be set when the state shifts to the specific state, there is a high possibility of winning in the specific determination immediately after the transition to the specific state. With such a configuration, in a configuration in which a specific notification may be performed across a specific state when a specific determination is made, even if the specific determination that triggered the specific notification is not won. , The merit of re-shifting to a specific state can be generated in addition to the confirmation of the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the specific notification.

Feature A18. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the second specific notification means terminates the specific notification after the high specific state when transitioning from the normal state to the specific state ends.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is executed across the specific states, the specific notification ends after the high specific state in the specific state of the remigrated side ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to end the specific notification based on the result of the specific determination in the high specific state, and the significance of setting the high specific state at the time of transition to the specific state is enhanced.

Feature A19. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods (games).
When the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is not the specific result, and the high specific state is set during the execution of the specific notification, the specific determination means is used in the high specific state. When the result of the executed specific determination is the specific result, the changing means (continuous using the pseudo precursor effect table by the display control device 81) that can change the executing specific notification to the notification corresponding to the specific result. (A function to execute the process of replacing the production with a continuous production using the precursor production table) and
The number of unit execution periods from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification is a common number between the case where the specific notification is changed by the change means and the case where the change is not performed. (In the display control device 81, the first CZ mode is set as 8 games and the normal section is less than 3 games, or the first CZ mode is set as 9 games and is normal. When the section is less than 2 games, the function to execute the continuous effect when the AT mode transition is won during the 1st CZ mode) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A17 or the feature A18, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A17 or the feature A18.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed across the specific states, the specific state on the rear side is regarded as the high specific state, and the specific judgment made in the high specific state is the winning. The length of the period from the start to the end of the already started specific notification may be the same as the case where the specific judgment made in the high specific state is not won. By doing so, while enjoying the merits of setting the specific state of the rear side to the high specific state, it is understood that the specific event is won in the specific state of the rear side and the case where it is not. It becomes possible to make it difficult, and it becomes difficult to understand when a specific event was won. Therefore, when the specific notification is performed across the specific states, it is possible to enjoy the specific notification until the end.

Feature A20. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods (games).
When the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is not the specific result, and the high specific state is set during the execution of the specific notification, the specific determination means is used in the high specific state. When the result of the executed specific determination is the specific result, the changing means (continuous using the pseudo precursor effect table by the display control device 81) that can change the executing specific notification to the notification corresponding to the specific result. (A function to execute the process of replacing the production with a continuous production using the precursor production table) and
The number of unit execution periods from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification is different depending on whether the specific notification is changed by the changing means or not. Second means (in the display control device 81, when the first CZ mode is set as 10 games and the normal section is less than one game, the AT mode transition is won during the first CZ mode. Function to execute production) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A17 to A19.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed across the specific states, the specific state on the rear side is regarded as the high specific state, and the specific judgment made in the high specific state is the winning. The length of the period from the start to the end of the already started specific notification may be different depending on whether the specific determination made in the high specific state is non-winning. By doing so, the merit of setting the specific state on the rear side to the high specific state can be further enhanced, and the degree of attention to the length of the period from the execution of the specific notification to the end can be greatly increased. can.

Feature A21. In the second means, when the specific notification is changed by the changing means, the specific notification is specified after the specific notification is started, as compared with the case where the specific notification is not changed by the changing means. The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the number of unit execution periods until the end of notification is increased.

According to the above configuration, when it can be determined that the specific determination of the high specific state in the specific state on the rear side has been won, the period from the start to the end of the specific notification is long. By doing so, the period from the start to the end of the specific notification is short, so that the period until the determination can be made is longer and longer than the configuration in which it can be determined that the winning was won. It will be possible to entertain for a period of time.

Feature A22. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods (games).
When the result of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is not the specific result, and the high specific state is set during the execution of the specific notification, the specific determination means is used in the high specific state. When the result of the executed specific determination is the specific result, the changing means (continuous using the pseudo precursor effect table by the display control device 81) that can change the executing specific notification to the notification corresponding to the specific result. (A function to execute the process of replacing the production with a continuous production using the precursor production table) and
The number of unit execution periods from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification is a common number between the case where the specific notification is changed by the change means and the case where the change is not performed. (In the display control device 81, the first CZ mode is set as 8 games and the normal section is less than 3 games, or the first CZ mode is set as 9 games and is normal. When the section is less than 2 games, the function to execute the continuous effect when the AT mode transition is won during the 1st CZ mode) and
The number of unit execution periods from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification is different depending on whether the specific notification is changed by the changing means or not. Second means (in the display control device 81, when the first CZ mode is set as 10 games and the normal section is less than one game, the AT mode transition is won during the first CZ mode. Function to execute production) and
Equipped with
Depending on whether the specific notification is changed by the changing means or not, the setting of the unit execution period by the first means is more row than the setting of the unit execution period by the second means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A17 to A21, which is characterized by being easily damaged.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed across the specific states, the specific state on the rear side is regarded as the high specific state, and the specific judgment made in the high specific state is the winning. When the specific judgment made in the high specific state is not won, and when the length of the period from the start to the end of the already started specific notification is the same length and when it is different. In a certain configuration, the same length is more likely than a different length. By doing so, the different lengths increase the rarity of the event that the specific judgment is won in the specific state on the rear side and the change of the specific notification is grasped. It is possible to raise interest in the length of the period during which the specific notification is executed due to the rarity, and to make the specific notification interested until the end even if the length of the period is the same.

Feature A23. At least the first control device (main control device 101) having the specific determination means, and
A second control device (display control device 81) having at least the specific notification means, and
Equipped with
The first control device is characterized in that the first control device has a means (a function of executing a precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101) for determining a timing for notifying the result of the specific determination by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A22.

According to the above configuration, a means for executing a specific determination as to whether or not a specific event advantageous to the player is caused and a means for executing the specific notification as a result notification are configured to have separate control devices. By separating the control device that performs the processing that is directly linked to the profit of the player and the control device that performs the processing for directing, the control device on the side that performs the processing that is directly linked to the profit is intensively dealt with. It will be possible to do so, and it will be possible to make it difficult to perform acts that try to enjoy unfair benefits. In such a configuration, if the timing for notifying the result of the specific determination can be freely determined on the second control device side for the effect, the effect design becomes overwhelmingly easy, but the result of the specific determination can be obtained. The sooner it is known, the earlier it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game, and the notification timing of the result of the specific determination is a part that is not a little related to the interests of the player, and the first control device. There are also circumstances that should be managed on the side. Therefore, in the above configuration, by daringly determining the notification timing of the result of the specific determination on the first control device side, it is possible to make a gaming machine that preferably guarantees the equality of profits among the players. It becomes.

Feature A24. The specific state notification means separately provided from the predetermined notification means, capable of executing the specific state notification corresponding to the specific state, and ending the specific state notification when the specific state ends. (Eighth display segment N8 as a section display)
In the case where the specific notification is performed by the second specific notification means, when the specific state in which the specific determination is made shifts to the normal state, the specific state notification by the specific state notification means ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, wherein the specific state notification is started by the specific state notification means when the normal state is changed to the specific state.

By enabling specific notification across specific states as in each of the above configurations, an excellent effect on the player can be expected, while the specific state and the normal state can be clearly distinguished as in the above configuration. By providing the specific state notification means, the manager of the game hall or the like can easily confirm at what timing the specific notification is the result notification of the specific determination executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably detect fraudulent acts that take advantage of the fact that the specific notification is performed across the specific states.

Feature A25. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result assuming that the winning of the predetermined result is established, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the prize of the first result is established, and the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode in the second operation mode. A specific result (pushing order bell) is set in which a prize for the second result is established, which may give a different privilege from the case where the prize for the first result is established when the operation is performed in.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, an embodiment in which the mode notification for the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. It is equipped with a notification means (a function to execute push order notification processing by the main control device 101).
The specific event means includes at least the specific event including the execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means or the transition to the mode notification state in which the mode notification is easily executed by the mode notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, which is characterized in that it is generated.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine in which the orbiting of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means and the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, there are different benefits depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means. Since the specific result to be given is set and the mode notification about the operation mode may be executed when the specific result is won, the playability in which the advantage is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification is realized. Then, the specific event is the result of the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused, with the fact that the mode notification is performed or the transition to the mode notification state in which the mode notification is easily performed as a specific event. By shifting from a specific state that can occur to a normal state in which a specific event cannot occur and then notifying after shifting to the specific state again, the mode notification is executed in the playability using the mode notification. It is possible to suitably suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of a specific state that can be played.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A25 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features A1 to A25, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E8, and the features F1 to F10 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set. ,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
Specific notification means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification about the result of specific determination by the specific determination means by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), and
Equipped with
As the specific state, the high specific state (CZ mode) in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is likely to be the specific result, and the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means rather than the high specific state is the specific result. A low specific state (normal mode) that is difficult to become is set,
As the high specific state,
The termination of the high specific state without the specific result does not trigger the establishment of the termination condition, or the termination of the high specific state without the specific result is unlikely to trigger the establishment of the termination condition. 1 high specific state (1st CZ mode) and
The second high specific state (second CZ mode), in which the end of the high specific state without the specific result is more likely to trigger the establishment of the end condition than in the case of the first high specific state.
Is set,
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the first high specific state after the first high specific state is completed, and is in the second high specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification regarding the specific determination executed in the above-mentioned can be executed after the second high specific state is completed.

In a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, the player's attention is focused on the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is generated. Then, by setting the high specific state and the low specific state in the specific state, in which the susceptibility of the specific result is different corresponding to the result of the specific determination causing the specific event, the inflection is provided in the specific state. It is also possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification as the result notification of the specific determination. Moreover, the high specific state is specified in these high specific states by providing a first high specific state that does not or is unlikely to trigger the end of the specific state and a second high specific state that is more likely to trigger the end. By balancing the expectation of a result and the loss of a non-specific result, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability in a high specific state. On the other hand, since the specific state may end when the second high specific state ends without producing a specific result, the end of the specific state may be a trigger for the end of the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, whether the first high specific state ends without a specific result or the second high specific state ends without a specific result, these high specific states The specific notification as the notification of the result of the specific determination is executed after the high specific state is completed. By doing so, since it is not specified by the timing of the result notification that the finished high specific state was the second high specific state, the end of the specific state itself can be obscured. Even if the finished high specific state is the second high specific state and the specific state itself ends at the end, the game is likely to be continued until the result notification of the specific determination is confirmed. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine will be suppressed and the interest in the gaming will be improved.

Feature B2. Mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification by the specific notification means (in the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81, a process of selecting an effect table for continuous effect from a precursor effect table or a pseudo precursor effect table is executed. Function)
The mode setting means is the notification mode of the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the first high specific state and the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the second high specific state. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the notification mode can be a common notification mode.

According to the above configuration, it is difficult to specify whether the high specific state that ended without producing a specific result was the first high specific state or the second high specific state, not only by the timing of the specific notification but also by the notification mode. This makes it difficult to understand the end of the specific state and makes it difficult to trigger the end of the game.

Feature B3. The mode setting means includes a selection means for selecting a notification mode group (effect table) of the present specific notification from a plurality of predetermined notification mode groups (precursor effect table, pseudo precursor effect table).
The selection means includes a notification mode group selected when setting a notification mode of the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the first high specific state, and the identification executed in the second high specific state. The game according to feature B2, wherein a common notification mode group can be selected between the notification mode group selected when setting the notification mode of the specific notification for determination. Machine.

As in the above configuration, when the notification mode group of the current specific notification is selected from a plurality of predetermined mode notification groups, and then the specific notification triggered by the first high specific state is executed. In the case of executing the specific notification triggered by the second high specific state, the configuration in which the specific notification of the same notification mode may be executed by making the configuration in which a common notification mode group can be selected is relatively It can be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature B4. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods (games).
Period setting means for setting the number of execution periods, which is the number of unit execution periods of the specific notification by the specific notification means (in the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81, the number of games until the end of the continuous effect is input to the continuous effect counter. Has a function to execute processing)
The period setting means executes the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the first high specific state and the execution period of the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the second high specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the number of periods can be set to be a common number of execution periods.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which specific notification is performed over a plurality of unit execution periods, regardless of whether the specific notification is triggered by the first high specific state or the second high specific state. , The number of execution periods of specific notification can be the same. Therefore, for example, even if the number of execution periods of the specific notification is large or small, it is difficult to specify that the trigger of the specific notification is a high specific state accompanied by the end of the specific state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the end of the game triggered by the end of the specific state by using the specific notification.

Feature B5. When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means, the execution number setting means for setting the number of executions of a predetermined game from the execution of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification to the execution of the specific notification. (A function to execute a process of inputting the number of games until the end of the continuous effect to the continuous effect counter in the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81).
The execution number setting means performs the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the first high specific state and the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the second high specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, which can be set so as to have a common number of executions depending on the case of execution.

According to the above configuration, whether the first high specific state ends without a specific result or the second high specific state ends without a specific result, these high specific states Since the number of executions of the predetermined game in which the specific notification is performed as the notification of the result of the specific determination may be common, it is difficult to specify that the finished high specific state was the second high specific state by the timing of the result notification. It is possible to enhance the effect of

Feature B6. A configuration in which the number of corresponding events (number of games in CZ mode) corresponding to the trigger event that triggers the execution of the specific determination in the first high specific state and the number of corresponding events in the second high specific state can be different. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5.

The specific notification is configured to be performed after the first high specific state or the second high specific state is completed, and the number of specific determinations in which the first high specific state is executed and the second high specific state are executed as in the above configuration. Even if the number of specific determinations can be different, the commonality of specific notifications is unlikely to be affected. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the specific judgment numbers of both high specific states can be non-common as in the above configuration, a variety of games using a plurality of high specific states are used within a range that does not eliminate the effect of the execution timing of the specific notification. It will be possible to achieve this.

Feature B7. When the first high specific state is set during the execution of the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the second high specific state, the specific determination by the specific determination means in the first high specific state is performed. Means that can reflect the result in the specific notification during the execution (process of switching to the continuous effect based on the precursor effect table when the precursor command is received during the continuous effect based on the pseudo precursor effect table by the display control device 81. , The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S2217 to S2219.

According to the above configuration, the first high specific state may be set while the specific notification based on the second high specific state is being executed. In this case, the specific notification during the execution may be set to the first high specific state. The result of the specific judgment in the state is reflected. By doing so, the specific result is specified by the specific notification based on the second high specific state without being aware that the first high specific state is reached during the specific notification based on the second high specific state. It is possible to increase the probability that the notification corresponding to the winning will be performed.

Feature B8. While it is permissible to be set to the first high specific state during the execution of the specific notification for the specific determination executed in the second high specific state, the first high specific state is set. One of features B1 to B7, characterized in that the setting to the second high specific state is restricted (step S812) during the execution of the specific notification for the specific determination executed. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification for the first high specific state can be set to the second high specific state while the specific notification for the second high specific state can be set to the first high specific state. Is restricted. By doing so, the result of the specific determination is notified after the end of both high specific states for both the first high specific state and the second high specific state, which differ in whether or not they trigger the end of the specific state. Although it is configured, it is possible to prevent the Ryotaka specific state from continuing endlessly through the specific notification.

Feature B9. When the second high specific state is completed, it is provided with an end determination means (a function of executing an advantageous section end lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of determining whether or not the end condition of the specific state is satisfied.
When the determination result by the end determination means is a result corresponding to the establishment of the end condition, the specific end means terminates the specific state, while the determination result by the end determination means satisfies the end condition. If the result does not correspond to the above-mentioned specific state, the specific state is not terminated.
The specific notification means executes the specific notification about the specific determination executed in the second high specific state after the second high specific state is completed, regardless of the determination result by the end determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, which is characterized in that it has a configuration of the above-mentioned game machine.

According to the above configuration, even in the second high specific state, the specific state may or may not end after the end of the second high specific state, regardless of whether or not the specific state ends. The specific notification is executed after the end of the second high specific state. That is, the specific notification executed after the high specific state is the specific notification when the specific state ends at the end of the second high specific state and the specific state when the specific state does not end at the end of the first high specific state. In addition to the specific notification, a specific state when the specific state does not end at the end of the second high specific state is added. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to determine whether or not the specific state has ended from the specific notification, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature B10. The specific event means is related to the result of the specific determination when the number of corresponding events corresponding to the trigger event of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a predetermined predetermined number (number of ceiling games) in the specific state. Instead, it is provided with a means capable of causing the specific event (a function of executing a process of setting an AT mode winning flag when the ceiling counter by the main control device 101 becomes 0).
In addition,
When the second high specific state ends in a situation where the corresponding event in the specific state is a specific number less than the predetermined number and the end of the second high specific state ends, the predetermined notification means or what is it? Special notification execution means capable of executing special notification by different notification means (processing for performing the second preparation start effect B when the ceiling counter is 13 or less when the end avoidance command by the display control device 81 is received, The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S2825 and S2827).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a so-called ceiling is set, a specific event may occur even if a specific result is not obtained when the number of corresponding events corresponding to the trigger event of the specific determination reaches a predetermined number. When the second high specific state ends in a situation where the specific number is close to the ceiling, special notification can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the specific state has ended at the end of the second high specific state even though the ceiling has been reached soon, for example, the first. 2 In a configuration where the specific state may not end at the end of the high specific state, the second high specific state, which is likely to cause a specific event, has ended, but it will reach the ceiling soon. I can let you know. That is, when the timing at which the second high specific state ends is near the ceiling, the end of the second high specific state does not only mean the end of the state in which a specific event is likely to occur, but also the specific state. Since it has the meaning that the ceiling is far away from the end, by using these for the production, it is possible to make the game play while the second high specific state does not end without a specific result or it is throbbing. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game playability by utilizing the relationship between the ceiling of the specific event in the specific state and the end timing of the second high specific state, and it is possible to use it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature B11. The specific number is set so that the difference from the predetermined number is equal to or less than the number from the end of the second high specific state to the end of the specific notification. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is executed when the number up to the ceiling is equal to or less than the number from the end of the second high specific state to the end of the specific notification, the second high specific state is specified. In a configuration in which the specific notification is executed after the specific state ends, if the specific state has not ended, the ceiling will be reached and a specific event will occur, and if the specific state has ended, the ceiling will not be reached. Since no specific event occurs in the ceiling, it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention until the specific notification is executed.

Feature B12. The specific notification means is configured to start the specific notification from a predetermined start trigger in the high specific state and end the specific notification at a predetermined end trigger after the high specific state ends. In the high specific state, the first specific notification (first preparation effect) as the specific notification is executed, and after the high specific state is completed, the second specific notification (second preparation effect, battle effect) is executed as the specific notification. ) Is executed,
First preparation by the first determination means (display control device 81) for determining the notification mode of the first specific notification by using the game content of each unit execution period in the first high specific state or the second high specific state. Processing to determine the production content of each game being produced, the function to execute steps S2406 to S2409), and
A second determination means (second preparation by the display control device 81) for determining the notification mode of the second specific notification by using the game content of each unit execution period in the first high specific state or the second high specific state. Processing to determine the production content of each game after the production based on various production tables, the function to execute steps S2212 to S2214), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11.

According to the above configuration, after the first specific notification in which the notification mode is determined by using the game content in each unit execution period of the first high specific state and the second high specific state is executed, the first high specific state is specified. Each unit in which the specific notification is performed is configured in which the second specific notification is executed and the specific notification is performed, in which the notification mode is determined by using the game content in each unit execution period of the state or the second high specific state. The game content in the execution period is reflected in the notification mode of the specific notification only during the period in which the first specific notification is performed, and when the second specific notification is shifted, the game content in the unit execution period before that is used. It becomes the notification mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the notification mode for the second specific notification before the game is performed, and the height is high regardless of whether or not the specific state ends after the high specific state. It is possible to determine in advance the notification mode after a specific state. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand which high specific state the specific notification is executed based on, and it becomes difficult to notice that the specific state ends.

Feature B13. When a predetermined first transition event (advantageous section transition) occurs, the transition to the first high specific state occurs, and a second transition event (winning in the CZ mode transition lottery) different from the first transition event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, characterized in that the configuration shifts to the second high specific state in the case of

According to the above configuration, the transition between the first high specific state and the second high specific state is caused by different events, and it is clarified that both high specific states are different. On the other hand, there is a difference that the first high specific state is less likely to trigger the end of the specific state than the second high specific state, and such a difference is made difficult to understand by the notification timing of the specific notification. That is, even if the control of the gaming machine is in a completely different high-specific state, by devising the notification mode of the specific notification as in the feature B1, it is possible to give the impression that the completely different high-specific states are the same. It will be possible.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B13 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features B1 to B13, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A25, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E8, and the features F1 to F10 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set. ,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
The specific notification means (continuous by the display control device 81) capable of controlling the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) so that the specific notification of the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is performed over a plurality of unit execution periods. Function to execute the production setting process) and
Equipped with
As the specific state, the high specific state (CZ mode) in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is likely to be the specific result, and the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means rather than the high specific state is the specific result. A low specific state (normal mode) that is difficult to become is set,
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification so that the normal state and the plurality of high specific states are included from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification (display control device 81). A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing continuous production over a second CZ mode, a normal section, and a first CZ mode).

In a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, the player's attention is focused on the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is generated. Then, by setting the high specific state and the low specific state in the specific state, in which the result of the specific determination becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event and the susceptibility is different, the specific state is provided with intonation and specified. It is also possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification as the judgment result notification. On the other hand, by adding inflection in a specific state in this way, there is a concern that the degree of attention in a low specific state or a normal state will decrease. However, if the period of the low specific state or the normal state is shortened by increasing the continuation rate of the specific state or the high specific state, there may be a problem that the ball ejection rate rises.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific notification as the result notification of the specific determination is a so-called continuous effect that can be executed over a plurality of unit execution periods, and the series of specific notifications includes a plurality of high specific states. In addition, by making the series of specific states include the normal state, the low specific state and the normal state are executed while the series of specific notifications are executed and the player's attention is increased. It becomes possible to include a certain period, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the decrease in the degree of attention in the low specific state or the normal state.

Feature C2. It is a configuration in which the normal state can exist between the high specific state and the high specific state.
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification so that the specific notification started in the high specific state is continued to the next high specific state via at least the normal state. The gaming machine according to the feature C1.

As in the above configuration, the normal state exists so as to be sandwiched between the high specific state and the high specific state, and the specific notification started in the high specific state on the front side is continued to the high specific state on the rear side. With the configuration, the normal state is inevitably included in the series of specific notifications. Moreover, by making the above configuration, if the game shifts to the normal state during the specific notification, the high specific state exists after that, so that the game may be terminated with the transition to the normal state. Will also be low. Therefore, by including the normal state in the specific notification that straddles a plurality of high specific states, not only the effect of suppressing the decrease in the degree of attention in the normal state but also the decrease in the operating rate triggered by the transition to the normal state is achieved. You can also expect the effect of suppressing.

Feature C3. The high specific state existing before the normal state has a configuration in which the determination result by the specific determination means is more likely to be the specific result than the high specific state existing after the normal state. The gaming machine according to the feature C2.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the normal state is sandwiched between the high specific state and the high specific state, the high specific state on the front side where the specific notification is started wins the specific judgment more than the high specific state on the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the specific notification started in the high specific state in which the specific determination is easily won.

Feature C4. The corresponding event corresponding to the trigger event in which the specific determination by the specific determination means is executed in the high specific state existing before the normal state than in the high specific state existing after the normal state. The gaming machine according to the feature C3, which is characterized in that the configuration is such that the game is likely to occur (the number of games is large).

According to the above configuration, the specific determination is more likely to be executed in the high specific state on the front side than in the high specific state on the rear side than in the high specific state on the rear side, and as a result, the specific determination is more likely to be a specific result. By doing so, for example, it is easy to obtain a specific result in both high specific states without using a configuration in which the probability of the specific judgment is different between the high specific state on the front side and the high specific state on the rear side. Can be different. Therefore, the effect of feature C3 can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature C5. The specific notification means includes the normal state and a plurality of the high specific states from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification, and is between the high specific state and the normal state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed so that the low specific state does not exist.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a normal state or a low specific state can be included in a series of specific notifications, the normal state and the low specific state are not continuously included. By doing so, it is possible to divide the period in which the attention level can decrease into a short period, and it can be expected that the attention level increased by the specific notification is maintained.

It should be noted that the above configuration states that "when the specific notification is executed so that the specific notification means includes the normal state and the plurality of high specific states, the specific transition means goes through the low specific state. It is possible to shift from the normal state to the high specific state, and the specific termination means can shift from the high specific state to the normal state without going through the low specific state. " It may be expressed.

Feature C6. The specific notification means is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed so that the specific notification started in the predetermined high specific state can be continued even after the transition to the low specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of C5.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification started in the high specific state is executed so as to be continued even after the transition to the low specific state, it is clear that the low specific state is also included in the series of specific notifications. Be made. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the degree of attention in a low specific state. Moreover, in the above configuration, the trigger for starting the specific notification is the high specific state, and the low specific state on the rear side is included in the specific notification instead of the low specific state on the front side of the high specific state. The effect of expecting that the result of the specific determination will be the specific result is enhanced rather than the specific notification started with the above.

Feature C7. From the start to the end of the specific notification by the specific notification means, the unit execution period in the high specific state is longer than the unit execution period in the normal state. The gaming machine according to any one of C6.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of high specific states and a normal state are included in a series of specific notifications, the ratio occupied by the high specific state is larger than the ratio occupied by the normal state. By doing so, the impression that the specific notification is executed based on the high specific state becomes stronger, and by increasing the expectation for the specific notification, the decrease in the degree of attention in the normal state is suppressed. The effect can be expected more.

Feature C8. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification so as not to include the normal state. Features C1 to C7. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, there is a pattern in which the normal state is not included in the series of specific notifications. Therefore, even if the specific notification is executed in the pattern including a plurality of high-probability states and the normal state, the normal state is executed. It becomes difficult to judge whether or not is included. As a result, the effect of the feature C1 such as suppressing the decrease in attention in the normal state due to the inclusion of the normal state in the series of specific notifications can be expected more.

Feature C9. It is provided with mode setting means (a function of executing a process of selecting a continuous effect table by the display control device 81) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification by the specific notification means.
The mode setting means executes the specific notification so that the normal state and the plurality of high specific states are included from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification by the specific notification means. A common mode of notification is set depending on whether the specific notification is executed or the specific notification is executed so that the normal state is not included between the start of the specific notification and the end of the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature C8, which is characterized in that it is possible to play.

According to the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification may be common between the pattern in which a plurality of high-probability states and the normal state are included in the series of specific notifications and the pattern in which the normal state is not included. It becomes difficult for the player to understand that the pattern includes the normal state. By doing so, the effect of the feature C1 such as suppressing the decrease in attention in the normal state due to the inclusion of the normal state in the series of specific notifications can be expected more.

Feature C10. A period setting means that can set the number of execution periods, which is the number of unit execution periods in which the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means (process of inputting the number of games of continuous production into the continuous production counter by the display control device 81). Function)
In the period setting means, the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means so that the normal state and the plurality of high specific states are included from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification. And the case where the specific notification is executed so that the normal state is not included from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification, the number of execution periods is common. The gaming machine according to feature C8 or feature C9, which is characterized in that it can be set to.

According to the above configuration, a unit execution from the start to the end of the specific notification in a pattern in which a plurality of high-probability states and a normal state are included in a series of specific notifications and a pattern in which the normal state is not included. Since the number of periods may be the same, it is difficult for the player to realize that the pattern includes a normal state. By doing so, the effect of the feature C1 such as suppressing the decrease in attention in the normal state due to the inclusion of the normal state in the series of specific notifications can be expected more.

Feature C11. In the specific state, the execution of the specific determination by the specific determination means is permitted, while in the normal state, the execution of the specific determination by the specific determination means is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, in the normal state, not only the specific event cannot occur, but also the specific determination itself is restricted in its execution. In such a configuration, there is a particular concern about a decrease in the degree of attention in the normal state, and it is significant to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention in the normal state by including the normal state in a series of specific notifications as in feature C1. Is enhanced.

The invention described in the above features C1 to C11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features C1 to C11, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B13, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E8, and the features F1 to F10 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set. ,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
A storage means that can store information corresponding to the end condition that triggered the end of the specific state by the specific end means (a function of executing a process of setting a flag after the end of the second CZ by the display control device 81). When,
When shifting to the specific state by the specific transition means, the specific notification means for executing the specific notification for the specific determination by the predetermined notification means (execution of the continuous effect setting process at the time of transition to the first CZ mode by the display control device 81). Function to do) and
A mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification by the specific notification means (a function of executing a process of setting an effect table in the continuous effect setting process of the display control device 81).
Equipped with
The mode setting means sets the notification mode of the specific notification according to the information corresponding to the end condition stored by the storage means, regardless of the advantage of the specific state to be transferred by the specific transition means. A gaming machine characterized by being able to play.

In a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, the player is interested in the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is generated. Since the notification mode of the specific notification is configured by the mode setting means, in order to diversify the mode of the specific notification for the specific judgment, information other than the propriety of the specific judgment for the specific event is added, and the specific judgment is made. There is a limit to the diversification beyond the contents of, and if you try to set multiple results with different advantages for the player regarding the result of the specific judgment, the game design including the setting of the ball output rate etc. Is required, and the setting of mode notification may be complicated. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to set the notification mode of the specific notification for the current specific judgment based on the end trigger of the previous specific state instead of the specific judgment in the current specific state, so that the specific state to be shifted can be set. It is possible to diversify the notification mode of the specific notification without causing the advantage and the content of the specific determination to be complicated. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D2. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the specific determination means and the specific end means, and
A second control device (display control device 81) having at least the specific notification means and the mode setting means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the storage means is provided in the second control device.

According to the above configuration, the player's interests include a specific determination means for executing a specific determination as to whether or not a specific event is advantageous to the player, and a specific termination means for terminating a specific state in which the specific event can occur. A control device directly connected to the control device and a control device for effect such as a specific notification means for executing specific notification as a result notification of the specific determination and a mode setting means for setting a notification mode of the specific notification are separated from each other. By separating each of them, it becomes possible to intensively take measures against fraudulent measures of the control device on the side directly connected to the profit, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of enjoying the fraudulent profit. In such a configuration, the storage means for storing the end condition of the specific state is configured to have a control device different from the control device on the side having the specific end means for terminating the specific state, so that the previous specific state can be stored. It is clarified that the end condition is not reflected in the advantage for the player in the next specific state. By doing so, it is possible to configure the effect setting in the current specific state using the end condition of the previous specific state as a pure effect setting regardless of the advantage for the player, for example. Even in a configuration in which the information in the specific state on the first control device side is initialized at the end of the specific state, the information in the specific state to be terminated can be used for the next production of the specific state.

Feature D3. The mode setting means is set when the information corresponding to the first end condition (end of the second CZ mode) is stored in the storage means as the end condition, and when the first end condition is satisfied. , Or, it is possible to set the notification mode of the specific notification by using the notification mode of the predetermined notification (continuous production using the pseudo continuous effect table) set when the first end condition is satisfied. Means (when the flag after the end of the second CZ is set at the start of the first CZ mode by the display control device 81, the process of diverting the pseudo continuous effect table being executed to set the continuous effect, steps S2307 to S2309. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, when the first end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends, the specific notification is performed by using the notification mode of the predetermined notification executed at the end of the specific state or at the end. The notification mode is set. By doing so, it becomes possible to associate the notification mode of the specific notification set at the time of transition to the specific state with the notification mode of the predetermined notification at the end of the previous specific state, and in the previous specific state. If the notification mode of the predetermined notification is used as it is, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the notification mode for association is stored in advance.

Feature D4. In the mode setting means, as the end condition, information corresponding to a second end condition (for example, the end of the third CZ mode) different from the first end condition is stored in the storage means, or the first. When the information corresponding to the end condition is not stored in the storage means, a predetermined notification (third CZ) is set when the second end condition is satisfied or when the second end condition is satisfied. A means (flag after the end of the second CZ at the start of the first CZ mode by the display control device 81) capable of setting the notification mode of the specific notification without using the notification mode of the defeat effect executed at the end of the mode). The gaming machine according to feature D3, which comprises a process of setting a CZ start effect at the start of the first CZ mode and a function of executing the process of step S2306 when is not set.

According to the above configuration, when the first end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends, it is premised that the notification mode of the specific notification is set so as to be the notification mode associated with the predetermined notification at the end. Then, when the second end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends, the specific state is specified without using the notification mode of the predetermined notification executed at the end of the specific state or at the end. The notification mode of the notification is set. In this way, there are cases where the specific notification associated with the predetermined notification at the end of the previous specific state is performed, and there are cases where the specific notification associated with the predetermined notification at the end of the previous specific state is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the notification mode while suppressing an increase in the capacity for storing the notification mode in advance.

Feature D5. As the specific state, the high specific state (CZ mode) in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is likely to be the specific result, and the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means rather than the high specific state is the specific result. A low specific state (normal mode) that is difficult to become is set,
As the end condition, the first end condition established when the predetermined high specific state (second CZ mode) ends, and the first end condition established when the predetermined high specific state (third CZ mode) ends. A second end condition that is different from the end condition is set,
The mode setting means first notifies when information corresponding to the establishment of the first termination condition is stored by the storage means regardless of the advantage of the specific state to be transferred by the specific transition means. The notification mode of the specific notification is set so as to be an embodiment, and when the information corresponding to the establishment of the second end condition is stored by the storage means, or the information corresponding to the first end condition is described. One of the features D1 to D4, which is characterized in that the notification mode of the specific notification is set so as to be a second notification mode different from the first notification mode when it is not stored in the storage means. The gaming machine described in.

In the above configuration, the specific state has a high specific state that is easy to win the specific judgment and a low specific state that is harder to win than the high specific state, and the end condition of the specific state is the case where the high specific state ends. There are a first end condition and a second end condition that are satisfied in. That is, in the invention of feature D1 in which the information at the end of the previous specific state is used to set the notification mode of the specific notification for the specific determination, the information at the end of the previous specific state is set to the specific state. It is configured to use the information that the high specific state where the specific event is likely to occur has ended. By doing so, it becomes possible to utilize the regret that the specific state has ended even though it was a high specific state in which a specific event is likely to occur, for the specific notification of the specific judgment in the next specific state. , The specific notification can be used to successfully associate the specific state with the specific state.

Feature D6. The number of corresponding events corresponding to the trigger event that triggers the execution of the specific determination in the predetermined high specific state differs between the case where the first end condition is satisfied and the case where the second end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature D5.

The number of corresponding events corresponding to the trigger event that triggers the execution of the specific judgment in the high specific state is the number that could receive the specific judgment in the high specific state, or the number of the specific judgments received but continued to deviate from the specific judgment. It corresponds to the number, and if the number is small, the player feels unsatisfactory, and if the number is large, the player feels more regret. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by making the end condition different according to the number of corresponding events in the high specific state, the notification mode of the specific notification in the next specific state is set by using the information corresponding to the end condition. In doing so, it is possible to make a specific notification that well reflects the player's unsatisfaction and regret.

Feature D7. The number of the corresponding events in the predetermined high specific state is set to be larger when the second end condition is satisfied than when the first end condition is satisfied.
The mode setting means is set when the information corresponding to the satisfaction of the first termination condition is stored, when the first termination condition is satisfied, or when the first termination condition is satisfied. Using the notification mode of the predetermined notification (continuous effect based on the pseudo precursor effect table set at the end of the second CZ mode) set in, the notification mode of the specific notification is set, and the second end condition is set. It is set when the information corresponding to the establishment is stored, the information corresponding to the first termination condition is not stored in the storage means, the second termination condition is satisfied, or the above. It is characterized in that the notification mode of the specific notification is set without using the notification mode of the predetermined notification (defeat effect executed at the end of the third CZ mode) set when the second end condition is satisfied. Feature The gaming machine described in D6.

As described above, since the number of corresponding events corresponds to the number that has received the specific judgment but continues to deviate from the specific judgment, the case where the first termination condition on the side where the number of corresponding events is small is satisfied. However, it is considered that the player feels unsatisfactory than when the second end condition is satisfied, and the first end condition is satisfied when the second end condition on the side with a large number of corresponding events is satisfied. It is thought that the player feels more regret than when he does. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the information that the specific state has ended is stored according to the first end condition, the predetermined notification at the time of termination is used to provide a notification mode that is highly relevant to the predetermined notification. If the notification mode of the specific notification is set so as to be, it is possible to compensate for the player's unsatisfactoryness. In addition, when the information that the specific state has ended is stored according to the second end condition, the specified notification at the time of the end is not used, and the specific notification has a low relevance to the predetermined notification. By setting the notification mode of, it is possible to make the player forget the regret of the player well and to play a specific state with a new feeling. In this way, by providing the weight of the relationship in associating the specific state with the specific state, it is possible to perform notification that is well matched to the psychological state of the player.

Feature D8. After executing the first specific notification (first preparation effect) in the predetermined unit execution period, the specific notification means corresponds to the result of the specific determination in the predetermined unit execution period (second specific notification). Execution of the preparation effect, battle effect) is regarded as one specific notification, and the specific notification can be executed over a plurality of unit execution periods.
When the first end condition is satisfied, the first specific notification is set, or when the first end condition is satisfied, the first specific notification is executed.
When the second end condition is satisfied, the second specific notification is executed.
When the information corresponding to the first termination condition is stored, the mode setting means sets the notification mode of the second specific notification by using the notification mode of the first specific notification, and sets the notification mode of the second specific notification. When the information corresponding to the condition that the end condition is satisfied is stored or the information corresponding to the first end condition is not stored in the storage means, the notification mode of the second specific notification is not used. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the first specific notification and the second specific notification modes are newly set.

According to the above configuration, in the specific notification, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are performed over a plurality of unit execution periods, and the specific notification ends when the second specific notification is executed. In a configuration that is a so-called continuous effect, the first end condition is satisfied at the stage where the first specific notification of the specific notifications is performed. Therefore, in this case, the first specific notification being executed is used. If the second specific notification is executed, it is possible to execute a continuous effect by the specific notification across the specific states, and the continuity of the specific notification is used to change the next specific state to the previous specific state. It can be made to think that it is a continuation of. On the other hand, since the second end condition is satisfied at the stage where the second specific notification is performed among the specific notifications, the series of specific notifications is completed at the end of the previous specific state. Therefore, when the second end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends, the specific state is newly started from the first specific notification when the specific state is re-shifted, so that the specific state can be changed with a new feeling. It can be a boost to play.

Feature D9. A predetermined information storage means (normal counter) capable of storing predetermined information in the normal state is provided.
The aspect setting means is characterized in that it is possible to set the notification mode of the specific notification by using the predetermined information from the establishment of the end condition to the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D8.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration for setting the notification mode of the specific notification in the current specific state by using the information corresponding to the end condition of the previous specific state, from the end of the previous specific state to the current specific state. The notification mode of the specific notification is set by using the predetermined information in the normal state until the transition. By doing so, in order to diversify the specific notification while associating the specific state with the specific state, the game content in the normal state between the specific state is also reflected in the specific notification. It is also possible to enhance the impression that the newly transitioned specific state is a continuous state from the previous state (previous specific state and normal state). Therefore, it is possible to make the game production more suitable and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D10. The specific notification means has a configuration capable of executing the specific notification over a plurality of unit execution periods.
The predetermined information storage means is configured to store information corresponding to the number of unit execution periods in the normal state.
The mode setting means is
The number of unit execution periods in the normal state from the establishment of the end condition to the transition to the specific state is subtracted from a predetermined predetermined value (the number of games in the first CZ mode plus 5). Subtraction means (a function of executing the process of step S2308 by the display control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to feature D9, wherein the notification mode of the specific notification can be set as the unit execution period in the specific notification based on the calculation result by the subtraction means.

According to the above configuration, the number of unit execution periods in the specific notification this time is reduced by the amount of the unit execution period in the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the normal state before the transition to the specific state affects the specific notification after the transition to the specific state, and the specific notification can be continuously produced from the normal state. You can strengthen a certain impression.

Feature D11. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set. ,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
A storage means that can store information corresponding to the end condition that triggered the end of the specific state by the specific end means (a function of executing a process of setting a flag after the end of the second CZ by the display control device 81). When,
When shifting to the specific state by the specific transition means, the specific notification means for executing the specific notification for the specific determination by the predetermined notification means (execution of the continuous effect setting process at the time of transition to the first CZ mode by the display control device 81). Function to do) and
A mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification by the specific notification means (a function of executing a process of setting an effect table in the continuous effect setting process of the display control device 81).
Equipped with
The mode setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to set a notification mode of the specific notification according to information corresponding to the end condition stored by the storage means.

In a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, the player is interested in the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is generated. Since the notification mode of the specific notification is configured by the mode setting means, in order to diversify the mode of the specific notification for the specific judgment, information other than the propriety of the specific judgment for the specific event is added, and the specific judgment is made. There is a limit to the diversification beyond the contents of, and if you try to set multiple results with different advantages for the player regarding the result of the specific judgment, the game design including the setting of the ball output rate etc. Is required, and the setting of mode notification may be complicated. Therefore, in the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification for the current specific judgment can be set based on the end trigger of the previous specific state instead of the specific judgment in the current specific state, so that the content of the specific judgment can be set. It is possible to diversify the notification mode of the specific notification without causing complexity. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features D1 to D11, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C11, the features E1 to E8, and the features F1 to F10 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set. ,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
The specific notification about the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is started based on a predetermined start trigger (end of the second CZ mode) and ends based on the predetermined end trigger (continuous effect counter = 0). , Specific notification means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) capable of controlling a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), and
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
The first specific notification means (AT winning notification triggered by the second CZ mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification so that the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger are included in the predetermined specific state. Function to execute production) and
The second specific notification means capable of executing the specific notification so that the predetermined start trigger is included in the predetermined specific state and the predetermined end trigger is included in the specific state that shifts after the predetermined specific state. (A function to execute the AT non-winning notification effect triggered by the second CZ mode by the display control device 81) and
Equipped with
It is set so that the specific notification executed by the second specific notification means is more likely to be the notification corresponding to the specific event than the specific notification executed by the first specific notification means. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

In a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, the player's attention is focused on the specific notification as the result notification of the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is generated. On the other hand, if the player shifts to a normal state in which such a specific event cannot occur, the game may be terminated as a result. Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific determination is started based on a predetermined start trigger, and ends based on the predetermined end trigger, so that the continuous effect is one. There are cases where it is executed during a specific state and cases where it is executed across multiple specific states, and there is a possibility that notification corresponding to a specific event will occur when it is executed across multiple specific states. Since the setting is set to be high, as long as the specific notification as the continuous effect is continued, even if the specific state ends, it is possible to easily continue the game until the next specific state. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game to be terminated when the end of the specific state is triggered, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine and improve the interest.

Feature E2. When the predetermined start trigger occurs, it is provided with an end determination means (a function of executing an advantageous section end lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an end determination as to whether or not the end condition of the specific state is satisfied. ,
When the result of the end determination by the end determination means is a result that does not correspond to the establishment of the end condition, the specific notification is executed by the first specific notification means.
When the result of the end determination by the end determination means is the result corresponding to the establishment of the end condition, the feature E1 is characterized in that the specific notification is executed by the second specific notification means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, an end determination is made as to whether or not to end the specific state at the start of the specific notification, and if the result of the end determination corresponds to not ending the specific state, the specific state is straddled. If the specific notification is executed and the result of the end determination corresponds to the end of the specific state, the specific notification straddling the specific state is executed. In this case, although it is a specific notification about the result of the specific determination, there is a high possibility that the specific notification corresponds to the specific result depending on the result of the end determination instead of the result of the specific determination. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the specific notification even in a situation where the expectation cannot be held. Therefore, the effect of continuing the game using the specific notification can be further enhanced.

Feature E3. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification in correspondence with the result of the specific determination executed by the specific determination means before the predetermined start trigger, and from the predetermined start trigger. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed in correspondence with the result of the specific determination executed by the specific determination means until the predetermined end trigger.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific notification is executed so as to correspond to the result of the specific determination before the predetermined start trigger, the predetermined end is after the predetermined start trigger. Since the specific notification is executed so as to correspond to the result of the specific judgment up to the trigger, the so-called continuous production is utilized while having the function as the specific notification to notify the result of the specific judgment. Therefore, the result of the specific determination during the continuous production can be reflected in the specific notification. Therefore, even if there is no expectation for the specific determination until the start of the specific notification, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the specific notification.

Feature E4. The end determination means can execute the end determination so that the probability of the result corresponding to the establishment of the end condition differs depending on the period after the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to the feature E2 or the feature E3.

According to the above configuration, by allowing the specific state to end according to the period after the transition to the specific state, for example, the specific state ends immediately even though the specific state has changed. , For example, in the case where the ceiling is provided in a specific state, it is also possible to solve the event that the specific state ends in a lap even though the ceiling is near. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to end the specific state by lottery while not erasing the playability using the specific state.

Feature E5. When the predetermined start trigger occurs, the process for performing the second preparation start effect by the start notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing the start notification (second preparation start effect) corresponding to the predetermined start opportunity. Has the ability to execute)
As the start notification, the high expectation start notification (second preparation start effect B) in which the expected degree of the specific notification started based on the predetermined start trigger is relatively high or low as the notification corresponding to the specific result is relatively high or low. ) And low expectation start notification (second preparation start production A) are set.
When the specific notification is executed by the first specific notification means, the start notification means is easier to execute the low expectation start notification than the high expectation start notification, and the specific notification is performed by the second specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that, when executed, the configuration is such that the high expectation start notification is easier to execute than the low expectation start notification.

According to the above configuration, by confirming the notification mode of the start notification, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation that the specific notification will be the notification corresponding to the specific result. In this case, the start notification is performed in a manner with higher expectation in the specific notification by the second specific notification means that straddles the specific state than by the specific notification by the first specific notification means that does not straddle the specific state. It can be expected that the possibility that the game will be terminated as a result of the termination of a specific state will be further reduced.

The "start notification" is not limited to the notification executed when the "predetermined start trigger" occurs, and for example, the notification executed after a predetermined period has passed after the "predetermined start trigger" has occurred. It also includes a notification that is executed over a plurality of unit execution periods when a "predetermined start trigger" occurs.

Feature E6. In the specific state, when the corresponding event corresponding to the trigger event of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a predetermined predetermined number (the number of ceiling games), the specific event is performed regardless of the result of the specific determination. It is equipped with a means that can be generated (a function that executes a process of setting the AT mode winning flag when the ceiling counter by the main control device 101 becomes 0).
The start notification means has a low expectation when the specific notification is executed by the first specific notification means and the corresponding event in the specific state is a specific number less than the predetermined number or more. The gaming machine according to feature E5, which has a configuration in which it is easier to execute the high-expected start notification than the start notification.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a so-called ceiling is set, a specific event may occur even if a specific result is not obtained when the number of corresponding events corresponding to the trigger event of the specific determination reaches a predetermined number. When a predetermined start trigger occurs in a situation where the number is close to the ceiling and the specific notification is performed without straddling the specific state, the high expectation start notification is executed instead of the low expectation start notification. In this way, even when a specific event can occur regardless of the result of the specific determination, by associating it with the specific notification, the degree of expectation that a specific event between the specific notification that straddles the specific state and the specific notification that does not straddle the specific state will occur. It is possible to adjust the height well.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the specific number is set so that the difference from the predetermined number is set to be equal to or less than the number until the predetermined end trigger occurs in the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the high expectation start notification when the specific state is not straddled is executed when the number to the ceiling is less than or equal to the number until the specific notification is completed. It is possible to associate a specific event based on it.

Feature E8. As the specific state, the high specific state (CZ mode) in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is likely to be the specific result, and the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means rather than the high specific state is the specific result. A low specific state (normal mode) that is difficult to become is set,
When shifting from the normal state to the specific state, the specific transition means executes a means capable of shifting to the high specific state (a process of setting to the first CZ mode at the time of transition to an advantageous section by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, since the high specific state may be set when the state shifts to the specific state, there is a high possibility of winning in the specific determination immediately after the transition to the specific state. With such a configuration, when the specific notification is performed across the specific states, the specific state on the rear side becomes the high specific state, so that the specific notification across the specific states becomes the notification corresponding to the specific event. The possibility can be increased.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E8 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features E1 to E8, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, and the features F1 to F10 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set. ,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
The specific notification means (display control device 81) capable of controlling a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) so that the specific notification of the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is performed over a plurality of unit execution periods. (Function to execute continuous production setting process) and
A mode setting means (a function of executing a process of setting an effect table for continuous effect by the display control device 81) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification by the specific notification means.
Equipped with
As a notification mode of the unit execution period in the specific notification set by the mode setting means, a high expectation unit mode in which the degree of expectation that the result of the specific determination is the specific result is relatively high or low (fanning effect C). And a low expectation unit mode (fanning effect A) are set,
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification so as to straddle the specific state and the specific state.
The mode setting means is at least one specific unit execution period (advantageous) from the unit execution period in the case of transitioning from the specific state to the normal state to the unit execution period in the case of transitioning from the normal state to the specific state. A specific mode setting means (display control device 81 that can set the notification mode of the specific notification so that the specific notification of the high expected unit mode is executed in the game from the section end game to the advantageous section transition game). 2 A gaming machine characterized by having a process of selecting an effect table in which an effect C is generated in an advantageous section end game at the end of the 2CZ mode, and a function of executing the processes of steps S3009 and S3010).

In a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, the player's attention is focused on the specific notification as the result notification of the specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is generated. Moreover, the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific determination is a so-called continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of unit execution periods, and then the specific result is used as the notification mode of the special notification in each unit execution period in the continuous effect. Since there is a high expectation unit mode with a high expectation and a low expectation unit mode with a low expectation that a specific result is obtained, when the specific notification as a so-called continuous production is performed, only the final result of the specific notification is performed. Instead, keep an eye on each unit execution period in which the specific notification is performed. On the other hand, when the specific notification is finally notified that the specific result is not won, such as the result of the specific determination being a non-winning of the specific result, the game ends with the specific notification as an opportunity. Furthermore, when the specific state ends at the time of the specific notification, there is a higher possibility that the game will end at that opportunity. Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific notification as a continuous effect is executed so as to straddle the specific state and the specific state, and further, in the specific unit execution period between the specific state and the specific state, the above-mentioned Since the notification mode of the specific notification is set so that the high expectation unit mode of the above is executed, even if the specific state ends during the specific notification and becomes the normal state. , It can be a boost to confirm the specific notification to the end. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the end of the game at the end of the specific state, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine, and improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The specific mode setting means is such that the specific notification of the high expected unit mode is executed in the specific unit execution period before shifting to the normal state between the specific state and the specific state. , The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the notification mode of the specific notification can be set.

According to the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification when the transition to the normal state is determined is determined before the transition to the normal state, and the category of the specific notification started before the normal state. It is possible to strengthen the impression of the high expectation unit mode in. That is, if the configuration is such that the specific notification of the high expectation unit mode is performed after the transition to the normal state, the impression that the specific notification of the high expectation unit mode is performed after the transition to the normal state becomes stronger, and the high expectation unit. It is easy to realize that the specific notification of the mode is merely a production that has nothing to do with the result of the specific determination. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect that the specific notification of the high expected unit mode in the normal state seems to correspond to the result of the specific determination, for example, the transition to the normal state. It is also possible to perform a fanning effect or the like for the specific notification of the high expectation unit mode from the front. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult for the game to end at the end of the specific state.

Feature F3. The specific mode setting means can set the notification mode of the specific notification so that the specific notification of the high expected unit mode is executed in the specific unit execution period at least by the time the specific notification is started. The gaming machine according to the feature F2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the feature F2.

Features F4. The specific state notification means separately provided from the predetermined notification means, capable of executing the specific state notification corresponding to the specific state, and ending the specific state notification when the specific state ends. (Eighth display segment N8 as a section display)
The specific mode setting means is such that the specific notification of the high expected unit aspect is executed by the specific unit execution period including at least the timing at which the specific state notification by the specific state notification means ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the notification mode can be set.

By providing the specific state notification means that can clearly distinguish between the specific state and the normal state as in the above configuration, not only the specific event advantageous to the player is occurring in the specific state, but also the specific event. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall, etc. to confirm that is not occurring in the normal state, not in the specific state, and it is possible to easily identify fraudulent acts such as causing a specific event illegally in the normal state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if such a specific state notification means is provided, it becomes easy for the player to specify that the specific state has ended, and the specific state is notified by straddling the specific state and the specific state. Despite trying to obfuscate the end of that particular state, the end of that particular state becomes unclear. Therefore, in the above configuration, the high expectation is made by performing the specific notification in the high expectation unit mode so as to include the timing when the specific state ends and the specific state notification by the specific state notification means ends. It is possible to raise the player's consciousness to the specific notification by the unit mode and make it difficult to notice that the specific state notification has ended, that is, the specific state has ended.

Feature F5. Based on the start operation by the player, the game corresponding to one unit execution period is started, and the game is started.
It is a configuration in which the game corresponding to one unit execution period is completed based on the end operation by the player.
The specific state notification means is configured to end the specific state notification based on the end operation of the unit execution period when the specific state ends.
The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the specific notification means can start specific notification according to the high expectation unit embodiment based on the end operation of the unit execution period.

According to the above configuration, since the end timing of the specific state notification by the specific state notification means and the start timing of the specific notification by the high expectation unit mode match, it is possible to increase the possibility that the end of the specific state notification is overlooked. .. In particular, since the specific notification by the high expectation unit mode is configured to be started by the player's own end operation, the notification of the high expectation unit mode in which the specific event can be expected in the running specific notification is started. It is thought that the end operation will be performed while praying for that. Therefore, it is easier to be interested in starting the high-expected unit mode by the amount generated at the player's own timing, rather than simply executing the specific notification by the high-expected unit mode at the timing of the gaming machine. .. Therefore, the effect of making it difficult to notice the end of the specific state notification can be expected.

Feature F6. Based on the start operation by the player, the game corresponding to one unit execution period is started, and the game is started.
It is a configuration in which the game corresponding to one unit execution period is completed based on the end operation by the player.
The specific state notification means has a configuration capable of starting the specific state notification based on the start operation of the unit execution period when shifting to the specific state.
The specific notification means is described in the feature F4 or the feature F5, which is characterized in that the specific notification means can be continued from the start of the specific notification according to the high expectation unit embodiment until at least the start operation is executed. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the start timing of the specific state notification by the specific state notification means and the end timing of the specific notification by the high expectation unit mode match, it is possible to increase the possibility that the start of the specific state notification is overlooked. .. In particular, since the specific notification by the high expectation unit mode is configured to be terminated by the player's own start operation, the notification of the high expectation unit mode in which the specific event can be expected is executed in the specific notification being executed. If so, for example, it is considered that the start operation is performed while praying that the highly expected unit mode is executed even in the next unit execution period and the corresponding notification is continued. Therefore, the attention to the end timing of the high-expected unit mode is more likely to be attracted to the amount generated at the player's own timing, rather than the configuration in which the specific notification by the high-expected unit mode is simply terminated at the timing of the gaming machine side. Therefore, the effect of making it difficult to notice the start of the specific state notification can be expected.

Feature F7. It is provided with a transition determination means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing the establishment determination of whether or not the transition condition is satisfied in the normal state.
In the establishment determination by the transition determination means executed based on one determination opportunity, the probability that the result of the establishment determination is the result that the transition condition is satisfied is that the result of the establishment determination satisfies the transition condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, which is characterized in that the probability of not performing is higher than the probability of not performing.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific notification is performed across a specific state and a specific state, in a normal state sandwiched between the specific state and the specific state, when the success or failure of the transition condition is determined once. Since the probability that the transition condition is satisfied is higher than the probability that the transition condition is not satisfied, it is possible to re-shift to a specific state with only one judgment trigger. The sex becomes high. By doing so, the period of the normal state becomes as short as possible, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to detect that the specific state has ended once.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the specific notification means can perform specific notification according to the high expectation unit embodiment even in the specific state.

By applying the configuration of the feature F1 to the gaming machine premised on the above configuration, the specific notification in the high expectation unit mode does not constitute a sign of the normal state, but the specification in the high expectation unit mode. By performing the notification, it becomes possible to more preferably expect the effect of making it difficult to notice that the specific state has ended.

Features F9. When the specific notification by the high expectation unit mode is executed a plurality of times in the specific notification, the specific mode setting means does not execute the first specific notification by the high expectation unit mode as the specific notification of the specific unit execution period. As described above, the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the notification mode of the specific notification can be set.

When the specific notification by the high expectation unit mode is executed a plurality of times in the series of specific notifications, the specific notification by the first high expectation unit mode is particularly likely to attract the attention of the player. In this case, if the specific notification by the first high expectation unit mode is performed in the normal state, the degree of attention to the occurrence of the specific notification of the high expectation unit mode is increased, and the game is played. The degree of concentration to is increased, and as a result, it is more likely that the specific state is terminated. Therefore, the high expectation is intentionally made so that the specific notification by the second and subsequent high expectation unit modes, in which the player's attention is lower than the specific notification by the first high expectation unit mode, is performed in the normal state. The end of a particular state can be successfully camouflaged to the unit aspect.

Feature F10. When a predetermined determination trigger occurs in the specific state, the end determination means (process for determining the number of end delay games by the main control device 101) for determining the timing at which the end condition is satisfied from a plurality of types of timings. A function for executing the processes of steps S2916 and S2917) is provided.
The specific mode setting means of the specific mode is such that the specific notification of the highly expected unit mode is executed according to the unit execution period including the timing at which the end condition determined by the end determination means is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that a notification mode is set.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the specific state ends is diversified, and it becomes difficult to detect the timing at which the specific state ends in advance. With such a configuration, it is more difficult to detect the end of the specific state by executing the specific notification of the highly expected unit mode in the unit execution period including the end timing. Be done.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F10 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features F1 to F10, the technical configuration shown by any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E8 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature F group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature F group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiter, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (7)

As the gaming state, a specific state in which a specific event advantageous to the player can occur and a normal state in which the specific event does not occur are set.
A specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state.
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event and the specific event means.
When the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied, the specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state, and
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state and the specific end means.
A specific notification means capable of controlling a predetermined notification means so that the specific notification of the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is performed over a plurality of unit execution periods.
Equipped with
As the specific state, a high specific state in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is likely to be the specific result, and a low specific state in which the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is less likely to be the specific result than the high specific state. The state is set and
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification so as to include the normal state and a plurality of the high specific states from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification. A game machine. It is a configuration in which the normal state can exist between the high specific state and the high specific state.
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification so that the specific notification started in the high specific state is continued to the next high specific state via at least the normal state. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The high specific state existing before the normal state has a configuration in which the determination result by the specific determination means is more likely to be the specific result than the high specific state existing after the normal state. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized. The specific notification means includes the normal state and a plurality of the high specific states from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification, and is between the high specific state and the normal state. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific notification can be executed so that the low specific state does not exist. The specific notification means is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed so that the specific notification started in the predetermined high specific state can be continued even after the transition to the low specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 4. The specific notification means is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed so that the normal state is not included from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of 5. A mode setting means for setting a notification mode of the specific notification by the specific notification means is provided.
The mode setting means executes the specific notification so that the normal state and the plurality of high specific states are included from the start of the specific notification to the end of the specific notification by the specific notification means. A common mode of notification is set depending on whether the specific notification is executed or the specific notification is executed so that the normal state is not included between the start of the specific notification and the end of the specific notification. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the gaming machine can be used.

Images